Agilent 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer Service Guide

Errata
Title & Document Type: 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer Service Guide
Manual Part Number: 08753-90406
Revision Date: December 1997
HP References in this Manual
This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that HewlettPackard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis
businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this
manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX.
For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
About this Manual
We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your
product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete
or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better
copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.
Support for Your Product
Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available
product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website:
www.tm.agilent.com
Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide
you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration
if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.
Service Guide
HP 8753D Network Analyzer
Option 011
ABCDE
Printed in USA
DRAFT 3/21/106 15:16
HP part number: 08753-90406 Supersedes October 1997
Printed in USA December 1997
Notice.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including
but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a particular
purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
c Copyright Hewlett-Packard Company 1995, 1996, 1997
All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway, Santa Rosa, CA 95403-1799, USA
Contents
1.
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Table of Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Microwave Connector Care . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference . . .
Option 002, Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 010, Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles . .
Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-5
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Contents-1
Tables
1-1. Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2. Service Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3. Connector Care Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-2
1-1
1-2
1-6
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
1
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Table of Service Test Equipment
Table 1-1. Required Tools
T-8, T-10, T-15, and T-20 TORX screwdrivers
Flat-blade screwdrivers 0 small, medium, and large
5/16-inch open-end wrench (for SMA nuts)
3/16, 5/16, and 9/16-inch hex nut drivers
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
2.5 mm hex-key driver
Non-conductive and non-ferrous adjustment tool
Needle-nose pliers
Tweezers
Anti-static work mat with wrist-strap
Floppy Disk 3.5-inch
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-1
Table 1-2. Service Test Equipment
Required
Equipment
Critical
Specications
Recommended
Model
Spectrum Analyzer
Frequency Accuracy 67 Hz
Frequency Counter
Frequency: 300 kHz - 3 GHz (6 GHz for Option HP 5350B
006)
Synthesized Sweeper
Maximum spurious input:
FM: <20 kHz
Oscilloscope
<030 dBc Residual
HP 8563E
Use*
A, T
P
HP 83640A
P
Bandwidth: 100 MHz
Accuracy: 10%
any
T
Digital Voltmeter
Resolution: 10 mV
any
T
Power Meter (HP-IB)
No substitute
HP 437A or 438A
A, P, T
Power Sensor
Frequency: 300 kHz-3 GHz
HP 8482A
A, P, T
Power Sensor (for Option 006)
Frequency: 3 GHz-6 GHz
HP 8481A
A, P
S-Parameter Test Set
Frequency Range: 3-6 GHz,
for Option 006: 3 GHz-6 GHz
HP 85046A1 /HP 85047A2 P
Transmission/Reection Test Set
Frequency: 300 kHz-3 GHz
Directivity: 30 dB
HP 85044A
P
Tool Kit
No substitute
HP part number
08753-60023
T
Photometer
Tektronix J16
A
Photometer Probe
Tektronix J6503
A
Light Occluder
Tektronix 016-0305-00
A
CRT Demagnetizer or Bulk Tape Eraser
Printer
HP ThinkJet, DeskJet,
LaserJet
P
Floppy Disk
3.5-inch
HP 92192A
A
Calibration Kit 7 mm
No substitute
HP 85031B
P
Calibration Kit Type-N
No substitute
HP 85032B
P
Verication Kit 7 mm
No substitute
HP 85029B
P
HP 85046B/47B
P (Option 011)
Test Set
For use with HP 8753D Option 011
2 For use with HP 8753D Option 011 and 006.
1
1-2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Table 1-2 Service Test Equipment (2 of 3)
Required
Equipment
Critical
Specications
Step Attenuator
110 dB(Calibrated @ 30 MHz)
Attenuators (xed):
Return loss:
3 dB
Recommended
Model
Use*
HP 8496A
P
Type-N
HP 8491A Opt. 003
P
20 dB
Type-N
HP 8491A Opt. 020
A, P, T
10 dB
Type-N
HP 8491A Opt. 010
A, P
30 dB
Type-N
HP 8491A Opt. 030
A, P
RF Cable
Type-N
HP P/N 8120-4721
A
RF Cable Set
12-inch, phase matched
HP 11500B
A
RF Cable Kit
Qty. 3, 50 , Type-N (m), matched
HP 11851B
A, P
RF Cable Set
50 7 mm
HP 85029B
P
RF Cable
24-inch APC-7
HP P/N 8120-4779
P
RF Cable
50 Type-N
HP P/N 8120-4781
P
RF Cable
50 , Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
HP 11500B
A
RF Cable
50 , 7 mm, 24-inch, matched
HP 11857D
P
HP-IB Cable
HP 10833A/B/C/D
A,P
BNC Cable
HP P/N 8120-1840
A,P
32 dB
Adapter
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)
HP P/N 1250-1472
A, P
Adapter
Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
HP P/N 1250-1475
A, P
Adapter
Type-N (f) to APC-7
HP 11524A
P
Adapter
Type-N (m) to APC-7
HP 11525A
P
Adapter
APC-3.5 (f) to Type-N (f)
HP P/N 1250-1745
P
Adapter
APC-3.5 (m) to APC-7
HP P/N 1250-1746
P
Adapter
Type-N (f) to BNC (m)
HP P/N 1250-0077
P
Adapter
BNC to Alligator Clip
HP P/N 8120-1292
A
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-3
Table 1-2 Service Test Equipment (3 of 3)
Required
Equipment
Critical
Specications
Recommended
Model
Use*
Power Splitter, 2-Way
Frequency: 300 kHz-6 GHz
HP 11667A
Option 001
A,P
Power Splitter, 3-Way
Frequency: 300 kHz-3 GHz Tracking between
outputs: 6.25 dB Output SWR: 61.1 dB
HP 11850C
P, T
Low Pass Filter
>50 dB @ 2.96 Hz and passband that includes
HP P/N 9135-0198
A
Termination
50 , Type-N (m), Return loss
HP 908A
P
Anti-static Wrist Strap
HP P/N 9300-1367
A, P, T
Anti-static Wrist Strap Cord
HP P/N 9300-0980
A, P, T
Static-control Table Mat and Earth
Ground Wire
HP P/N 9300-0797
A, P, T
800 MHz
30 dB
*
P - Performance Tests
A - Adjustment
T - Troubleshooting
1-4 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Principles of Microwave Connector Care
Proper connector care and connection techniques are critical for accurate, repeatable
measurements.
Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information. Prior to making
connections to the network analyzer, carefully review the information about inspecting,
cleaning and gaging connectors.
Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these devices. In
addition, you obtain the most accurate measurements.
This type of information is typically located in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit manuals.
For additional connector care instruction, contact your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and
Service Oce about course numbers HP 85050A+24A and
HP 85050A+24D.
See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-5
Table 1-3. Connector Care Quick Reference
Do
Handling and Storage
Keep connectors clean
Extend sleeve or connector nut
Use plastic end-caps during storage
Do
Do Not
Touch mating-plane surfaces
Set connectors contact-end down
Visual Inspection
Do Not
Use a damaged connector - ever
Inspect all connectors carefully
Look for metal particles, scratches, and dents
Do
Connector Cleaning
Use any abrasives
Get liquid into plastic support beads
Try compressed air rst
Use isopropyl alcohol
Clean connector threads
Do
Gaging Connectors
Clean and zero the gage before use
Use the correct gage type
Use correct end of calibration block
Gage all connectors before rst use
Do
Do Not
Making Connections
Align connectors carefully
Make preliminary connection lightly
Turn only the connector nut
Use a torque wrench for nal connect
1-6 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
Do Not
Use an out-of-spec connector
Do Not
Apply bending force to connection
Over tighten preliminary connection
Twist or screw any connection
Tighten past torque wrench \break" point
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Analyzer Options Available
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference
This option oers 60.05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 60 C (referenced to 25 C).
Option 002, Harmonic Mode
This option provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test device's
fundamental output signal. Frequency and power sweep are supported in this mode.
Harmonic frequencies can be measured up to the maximum frequency of the receiver.
However, the fundamental frequency may not be lower than 16 MHz.
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation
This option extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 6 GHz.
Option 010, Time Domain
This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse Fourier
transform of the frequency domain response. It shows the response of a test device as a
function of time or distance. Displaying the reection coecient of a network versus time
determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity. Displaying the transmission
coecient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission
paths. Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the correction that is active
in of such devices as SAW lters, SAW delay lines, RF cables, and RF antennas.
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19
inches) horizontal spacing.
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles
This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of anges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19 inches)
spacing.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-7
Service and Support Options
The analyzer automatically includes a one-year on-site service warranty, where available. If
on-site service is not available in your local area, you can purchase the analyzer with a W08
Option, which converts the one year on-site warranty to a three year return to HP warranty.
Consult your local HP customer engineer for details.
The following service and support options are available at the time you purchase an HP
8753D Option 011 network analyzer.
Option W31
This option adds two years of on-site repair to the product warranty, providing three years of
repair coverage.
Option W51
This option adds four years of on-site repair to the product warranty, providing ve years of
repair coverage.
Option W32
This option provides three years of return to HP calibration service.
Option W52
This option provides ve years of return to HP calibration service.
Option W34
This option provides three years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration.
1-8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Option W54
This option provides ve years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration.
If support was not purchased along with the analyzer, there are many repair and calibration
options available from Hewlett-Packard's support organization. These options cover a range
of on-site services and agreements with varying response times as well as return to HP
agreements and per-incident pricing. Contact your local Hewlett-Packard customer engineer
for details.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:06
Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1-9
Contents
2a.
Performance Test Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
2a-1
Contents-1
2a
Performance Test Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of
300 kHz to 3 GHz
Note
See the next \Performance Test Record" section if your analyzer frequency
range is from 30 kHz to 6 GHz (Option 006).
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Performance Test Record 2a-1
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (1 of 18)
Calibration Lab Address:
Report Number
Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer's Name
Performed by
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Serial No.
Firmware Revision
Ambient Temperature
Test Equipment Used:
Description
Model Number
Frequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verication Kit
Notes/Comments:
2a-2 Performance Test Record
Option(s)
C Relative Humidity
%
Trace Number Cal Due Date
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (2 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
77
CW Frequency
(MHz)
0.3
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
1. Source Frequency Range and Accuracy
Lower Limit
Measured Value
Upper Limit
(MHz)
(MHz)
(MHz)
0.299 997
0.300 003
5.0
4.999 950
5.000 050
16.0
15.999 840
16.000 160
31.0
30.999 690
31.000 310
60.999 999
60.999 390
61.000 610
121.0
120.998 790
121.001 210
180.0
179.998 200
180.001 800
310.0
309.995 900
310.003 100
700.0
699.930 000
700.007 000
1 300.0
1 299.987
1 300.013
2 000.0
1 999.980
2 000.020
3 000.0
2 999.970
3 000.030
Measurement
Uncertainty
(MHz)
6 0.000 000 520
6 0.000 008 610
6 0.000 028 220
6 0.000 053 730
6 0.000 104 800
6 0.000 206 800
6 0.000 307 200
6 0.000 528 300
6 0.001 191 700
6 0.002 212 300
6 0.003 403 000
6 0.005 104 000
Performance Test Record 2a-3
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (3 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Path Loss Calculations Worksheet 0
Second Value
First Value
Source Output
(dB)
(dB)
Power Level
(dBm)
77
CW Frequency
300 kHz
+10
20 MHz
+10
50 MHz
+10
100 MHz
+10
200 MHz
+10
500 MHz
+10
1 GHz
+10
2 GHz
+10
3 GHz
+10
2a-4 Performance Test Record
Path Loss
(dB)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (4 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Power Range and Power Linearity 0
Measured
Power
Source Power Level Power Path Loss
Linearity
(dB)
Value
Oset
(dBm)
(dB)
(dB)
(dB)
77
CW Freq. = 300 kHz
05
03
01
+15
+13
+11
+1
+9
+3
+7
+5
+5
+7
+3
+9
+11
+13
+15
+17
+20
+1
01
03
05
07
0 10
CW Freq. = 3 GHz
05
03
01
+15
+13
+11
+1
+9
+3
+7
+5
+5
+7
+3
+9
+1
+11
+13
+15
+17
+20
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
01
03
05
07
0 10
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.17
6 0.17
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.17
6 0.17
Performance Test Record 2a-5
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (5 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Power Level Accuracy 0
Measured Power Level
Calibrated
Path Loss
Accuracy
Value
(dB)
Power Level
(dB)
(dB)
(dB)
77
CW Frequency
(MHz)
Source Output Power
Level = +10dBm
0.300
20.000
50.000
100.000
200.000
500.000
1000.000
2000.000
3000.000
2a-6 Performance Test Record
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 0.33
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.20
6 0.20
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (6 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
CW Frequency
300 kHz
3.29 MHz
3.31 MHz
15.90 MHz
16.10 MHz
30.90 MHz
31.10 MHz
1.6069 GHz
1.6071 GHz
3.000 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
77
3. Receiver Minimum R Channel Level
Specication
Marker Value
(dB)
(dB)
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
Performance Test Record 2a-7
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (7 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
4. Receiver Minimum R Channel Level for External Source Mode
Measured Value
CW Frequency
Frac-N VCO
Frac-N VCO
Upper Limit
(MHz)
(MHz)
Lower Limit
(MHz)
(MHz)
77
Measurement
Uncertainty
10
49.496
50.496
N/A
20
37.620
38.380
N/A
100
49.005
49.995
N/A
1000
36.630
37.370
N/A
3000
58.216
59.392
N/A
2a-8 Performance Test Record
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (8 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
77
5. Receiver Channel Noise Floor Level
IF Bandwidth Specication
Calculated
(dBm)
Value
Receiver Channel A
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
3 kHz
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
10 Hz
Receiver Channel B
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
10 Hz
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
3 kHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
0 90
0 110
0 110
0 90
Measurement
Uncertainty
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Performance Test Record 2a-9
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (9 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
7. Receiver Magnitude Frequency Response
CW Frequency Power
R Input A Input B Input Greatest
Power Dierence
Meter
Power
Power
Reading
77
Example
0 10.0
0 10.14
300 kHz
5 MHz
16 MHz
31 MHz
61 MHz
121 MHz
180 MHz
310 MHz
700 MHz
1.5 GHz
2.0 GHz
2.5 GHz
3.0 GHz
2a-10 Performance Test Record
0 10.09
0 10.10
0.14
Spec.
(dB)
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 0.05
6 0.14
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.11
6 0.11
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (10 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
77
8. Phase Frequency Response
Ratio
Specication
300 kHz - 3 GHz
A/R
300 kHz - 3 GHz
B/R
300 kHz - 3 GHz
A/B
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
6 3
6 3
6 3
Measured Value Measurement
Uncertainty
6 0.67
6 0.67
6 0.67
Performance Test Record 2a-11
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (11 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
9. Receiver Input Crosstalk
Specication
Marker Value
(dB)
77
R into A Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
R into B Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
B into A Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
A into B Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
2a-12 Performance Test Record
Measurement
Uncertainty
0 100
0 90
6 5.1 dB
6 5.1 dB
0 100
0 90
6 5.1 dB
6 5.1 dB
0 100
0 90
6 5.1 dB
6 5.1 dB
0 100
0 90
6 5.1 dB
6 5.1 dB
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (12 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
CW Frequency
(GHz)
Ratio
3
A/R
3
B/R
3
A/B
3
A/B
3
B/R
3
A/R
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
77
10. Receiver Trace Noise
Measured Value
Specication
(rms)
0.006 dB
0.006 dB
0.006 dB
0.038
0.038
0.038
Measurement
Uncertainty
6 0.001 dB
6 0.001 dB
6 0.001 dB
6 0.01
6 0.0 6 0.01
Performance Test Record 2a-13
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (13 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
11. Receiver Input Impedance
B Return Loss A Return Loss R Return Loss Specication
(A/R)
(B/R)
(A/B)
(dB)
77
300 kHz - 2 MHz
2 MHz - 1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz - 3 GHz
2a-14 Performance Test Record
20
23
20
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
6 0.58
6 0.58
6 0.58
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (14 of 18)
For 300 kHz|3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
12. Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
G
F
jG 0 F j
Expected
Dynamic
8496A
Test Port
Accuracy
Attn. Measurement Measurement
(dBm)
(dBm)
(Calculated)
(dB)
77
Test Port
Input Power
Channel B
0 10
0 20 (Ref)
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 70
0 80
0 90
0 100
0.075
6 0.008
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
0.075
6 0.008
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Channel A
0 10
0 20 (Ref)
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 70
0 80
0 90
0 100
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
Reference
0
10
Spec.
(dB)
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.058
0.089
0.240
0.680
1.950
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.058
0.089
0.240
0.680
1.950
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.027
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.027
Performance Test Record 2a-15
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (15 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
13. Receiver Compression - Magnitude
CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power
Measured
Specication
(dBm)
(dBm)
Value
(dB)
(dB)
77
Channel A
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
Channel B
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
Channel R
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
2a-16 Performance Test Record
Measurement
Uncertainty
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
0.32 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
6 0.1 dB
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (16 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
14. Receiver Compression - Phase
CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power
Measured
Specication
(dBm)
(dBm)
Value
(degrees)
(degrees)
77
Channel A
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
Channel B
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
Channel R
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
Measurement
Uncertainty
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Performance Test Record 2a-17
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (17 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Stop Frequency
(GHz)
15. Source and Receiver Harmonics
Harmonic
Specication
Measured Value
(dBc)
77
Source Harmonics
1.5
2nd
1.0
3rd
Source and Receiver
Harmonics
1.5
A: 2nd
1.0
A: 3rd
1.5
B: 2nd
1.0
B: 3rd
Receiver Harmonics
1.5
B: 2nd
1.0
B: 3rd
1.5
A: 2nd
1.0
A: 3rd
2a-18 Performance Test Record
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
< 0 25
< 0 25
61
61
< 0 15
< 0 30
< 0 15
< 0 30
61
61
61
61
< 0 15
< 0 30
< 0 15
< 0 30
61
61
61
61
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (18 of 18)
For 300 kHz-3 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Analyzer
Frequency
Ext.
Source
Freq.
16 MHz
32 MHz
16 MHz
48 MHz
31 MHz
62 MHz
31 MHz
93 MHz
61 MHz
122 MHz
61 MHz
183 MHz
121 MHz
242 MHz
121 MHz
363 MHz
180 MHz
360 MHz
180 MHz
540 MHz
310 MHz
620 MHz
310 MHz
930 MHz
700 MHz
1.4 GHz
700 MHz
2.1 GHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
1 GHz
3 GHz
1.5 GHz
3 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
77
16. Magnitude Frequency Response
Input A Input B Max. Di.
Power
Meter
Value
Value
Spec.
Value
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
6 0.17 dB
Performance Test Record 2a-19
Contents
2b. Performance Test Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 6 GHz . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
2b-1
Contents-1
2b
Performance Test Record
For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of
30 kHz to 6 GHz
Note
See the previous \Performance Test Record" section if your analyzer frequency
range is from 300 kHz to 3 GHz.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Performance Test Record 2b-1
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (1 of 18)
Calibration Lab Address:
Report Number
Date
Last Calibration Date
Customer's Name
Performed by
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Serial No.
Firmware Revision
Ambient Temperature
Test Equipment Used:
Description
Model Number
Frequency Counter
Power Meter
Power Sensor
Calibration Kit
Verication Kit
Notes/Comments:
2b-2 Performance Test Record
C
Option(s)
%
Relative Humidity
Trace Number Cal Due Date
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (2 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option Report Number
006
Date
Serial Number
77
CW Frequency
(MHz)
0.3
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
1. Source Frequency Range and Accuracy
Lower Limit
Measured Value
Upper Limit
(MHz)
(MHz)
(MHz)
0.299 997
0.300 003
5.0
4.999 950
5.000 050
16.0
15.999 840
16.000 160
31.0
30.999 690
31.000 310
60.999 999
60.999 390
61.000 610
121.0
120.998 790
121.001 210
180.0
179.998 200
180.001 800
310.0
309.995 900
310.003 100
700.0
699.930 000
700.007 000
1 300.0
1 299.987
1 300.013
2 000.0
1 999.980
2 000.020
3 000.0
2 999.970
3 000.030
4 000.0
3 999.960
4 000.040
5 000.0
4 999.950
5 000.050
6 000.0
5 999.940
6 000.060
Measurement
Uncertainty
(MHz)
6 0.000 000 520
6 0.000 008 610
6 0.000 028 220
6 0.000 053 730
6 0.000 104 800
6 0.000 206 800
6 0.000 307 200
6 0.000 528 300
6 0.001 191 700
6 0.002 212 300
6 0.003 403 000
6 0.005 104 000
6 0.006 805 000
6 0.008 506 000
6 0.010 207 000
Performance Test Record 2b-3
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (3 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Path Loss Calculations Worksheet 0
Second Value
First Value
Source Output
(dB)
(dB)
Power Level
(dBm)
77
CW Frequency
300 kHz
+10
20 MHz
+10
50 MHz
+10
100 MHz
+10
200 MHz
+10
500 MHz
+10
1 GHz
+10
2 GHz
+10
3 GHz
+10
4 GHz
+10
5 GHz
+10
6 GHz
+10
2b-4 Performance Test Record
Path Loss
(dB)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (4 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Power Range and Power Linearity 0
Measured
Power
Source Power Level Power Path Loss
(dBm)
Oset
(dB)
Value
Linearity
(dB)
(dB)
(dB)
77
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.17
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
CW Frequency
= 300kHz
05
03
01
+15
+13
+11
+1
+9
+3
+7
+5
+5
+7
+3
+9
+11
+13
+15
+18
+1
01
03
05
08
CW Frequency
= 3 GHz
05
03
01
+15
+13
+11
+1
+9
+3
+7
+5
+5
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Performance Test Record 2b-5
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (4 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers (continued)
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Power Range and Power Linearity 0
Measured
Power
Source Power Level Power Path Loss
(dBm)
Oset
(dB)
Value
Linearity
(dB)
(dB)
(dB)
77
+7
+3
+9
+1
+11
+13
+15
+18
01
03
05
08
CW Frequency = 6 GHz
05
03
01
+15
+13
+11
+1
+9
+3
+7
+5
+5
+7
+3
+9
+11
+13
+15
+18
+1
01
03
05
08
2b-6 Performance Test Record
Spec.
(dB)
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.25
6 0.5
6 0.5
6 0.5
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.17
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.02
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.0
6 0.17
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (5 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
2. Source Power Range, Linearity, and Accuracy:
0 Power Level Accuracy 0
Measured Power Level
Path Loss
Calibrated
Accuracy
Value
(dB)
Power Level
(dB)
(dB)
(dB)
77
CW Frequency
(MHz)
Source Output Power
Level = +10dBm
0.300
20.000
50.000
100.000
200.000
500.000
1 000.000
2 000.000
3 000.000
4 000.000
5 000.000
6 000.000
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 0.33
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.20
6 0.20
6 0.17
6 0.17
6 0.17
Performance Test Record 2b-7
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (6 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
CW Frequency
77
3. Receiver Minimum R Channel Level
Specication
Marker Value
(dB)
(dB)
300 kHz
3.29 MHz
3.31 MHz
15.90 MHz
16.10 MHz
30.90 MHz
31.10 MHz
1.6069 GHz
1.6071 GHz
3.000 GHz
4.000 GHz
5.000 GHz
6.000 GHz
2b-8 Performance Test Record
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 35
< 0 30
< 0 30
< 0 30
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 1.0
6 2.0
6 2.0
6 2.0
6 2.0
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (7 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
4. Receiver Minimum R Channel Level for External Source Mode
CW Frequency
Frac-N VCO
Frac-N VCO
Measured Value
(MHz)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
(MHz)
(MHz)
(MHz)
77
10
49.496
50.496
Measurement
Uncertainty
N/A
20
37.620
38.380
N/A
100
49.005
49.995
N/A
1 000
36.630
37.370
N/A
3 000
58.216
59.392
N/A
4 000
48.181
48.663
N/A
5 000
43.470
43.905
N/A
6 000
52.165
52.687
N/A
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Performance Test Record 2b-9
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (8 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Frequency Range
77
Report Number
Date
6. Receiver Channel Noise Floor Level
IF Bandwidth Specication
Calculated
(dBm)
Value
Receiver Channel A
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
3 kHz
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
10 Hz
Receiver Channel B
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
10 Hz
300 kHz - 3.0 GHz
3 kHz
Receiver Channel B
3.0 GHz - 6.0 GHz
3 kHz
3.0 GHz - 6.0 GHz
10 Hz
Receiver Channel A
3.0 GHz - 6.0 GHz
10 Hz
3.0 GHz - 6.0 GHz
3 kHz
2b-10 Performance Test Record
0 90
0 110
0 110
0 90
0 85
0 105
0 105
0 85
Measurement
Uncertainty
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (9 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
7. Receiver Magnitude Frequency Response
CW Frequency Power
R Input A Input B Input Greatest
Power Dierence
Meter
Power
Power
Reading
77
Example
300 kHz
5 MHz
16 MHz
31 MHz
61 MHz
121 MHz
180 MHz
310 MHz
700 MHz
1.5 GHz
2.0 GHz
2.5 GHz
3.0 GHz
3.5 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.5 GHz
5.0 GHz
5.5 GHz
6.0 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
0 10.0
0 10.14
0 10.09
0 10.10
0.14
Spec.
(dB)
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
62
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
6 0.05
6 0.14
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.10
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.11
6 0.14
6 0.14
6 0. 14
6 0. 14
Performance Test Record 2b-11
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (10 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Frequency Range
77
Report Number
Date
8. Phase Frequency Response
Ratio
Specication
300 kHz - 3 GHz
A/R
300 kHz - 3 GHz
B/R
300 kHz - 3 GHz
A/B
3 GHz - 6 GHz
A/B
3 GHz - 6 GHz
A/R
3 GHz - 6 GHz
B/R
2b-12 Performance Test Record
6 3
6 3
6 3
6 10
6 10
6 10
Measured Value Measurement
Uncertainty
6 0.67
6 0.67
6 0.67
6 0.67
6 0.67
6 0.67
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (11 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
R into A Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
3.0 GHz - 4.5 GHz
4.5 GHz - 6.0 GHz
R into B Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
3.0 GHz - 4.5 GHz
4.5 GHz - 6.0 GHz
B into A Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
3.0 GHz - 4.5 GHz
4.5 GHz - 6.0 GHz
A into B Crosstalk
300 kHz - 1.0 GHz
1.0 GHz - 3.0 GHz
3.0 GHz - 4.5 GHz
4.5 GHz - 6.0 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
9. Receiver Input Crosstalk
Specication
Marker Value
(dB)
77
Measurement
Uncertainty
0 100
0 90
0 82
0 75
6 5.1
6 5.1
6 5.4
6 5.4
0 100
0 90
0 82
0 75
6 5.1
6 5.1
6 5.4
6 5.4
0 100
0 90
0 82
0 75
6 5.1
6 5.1
6 5.4
6 5.4
0 100
0 90
0 82
0 75
6 5.1
6 5.1
6 5.4
6 5.4
Performance Test Record 2b-13
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (12 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
CW Frequency
(GHz)
Ratio
6
A/R
6
B/R
6
A/B
6
A/B
6
B/R
6
A/R
Report Number
Date
77
2b-14 Performance Test Record
10. Receiver Trace Noise
Measured Value
Specication
(rms)
0.010 dB
0.010 dB
0.010 dB
0.070
0.070
0.070
Measurement
Uncertainty
6 0.001 DB
6 0.001 DB
6 0.001 DB
6 0.01
6 0.01
6 0.01
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (13 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Frequency Range
300 kHz - 2 MHz
2 MHz - 1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz - 3 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
11. Receiver Input Impedance
B Return Loss A Return Loss R Return Loss Specication
(A/R)
(B/R)
(A/B)
(dB)
77
20
23
20
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
6 0.58
6 0.58
6 0.58
Performance Test Record 2b-15
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (14 of 18)
For 30 kHz|6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
12. Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
G
F
jG 0 F j
Expected
Dynamic
8496A
Test Port
Accuracy
Attn. Measurement Measurement
(dBm)
(dBm)
(Calculated)
(dB)
77
Test Port
Input Power
Channel B
0 10
0 20 (Ref )
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 70
0 80
0 90
0 100
0.075
6 0.008
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
0.075
6 0.008
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Channel A
0 10
0 20 (Ref )
0 30
0 40
0 50
0 60
0 70
0 80
0 90
0 100
0
10
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
Reference
0
10
Spec.
(dB)
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
2b-16 Performance Test Record
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.058
0.089
0.240
0.680
1.950
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.058
0.089
0.240
0.680
1.950
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.027
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.008
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.017
6 0.027
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (15 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
13. Receiver Compression - Magnitude
CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power
Measured
Specication
(dBm)
(dBm)
Value
(dB)
(dB)
77
Channel A
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
Channel B
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
Channel R
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Measurement
Uncertainty
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
6 0.1 DB
Performance Test Record 2b-17
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (16 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Report Number
Date
14. Receiver Compression - Phase
CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power
Measured
Specication
(dBm)
(dBm)
Value
(degrees)
(degrees)
77
Channel A
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
Channel B
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
Channel R
50 MHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
3 GHz
4 GHz
5 GHz
6 GHz
2b-18 Performance Test Record
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.2
Measurement
Uncertainty
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (17 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
Option 006
Serial Number
Stop Frequency
(GHz)
15. Source and Receiver Harmonics
Harmonic
Specication
Measured Value
(dBc)
3
2nd
2
3rd
Source and Receiver
Harmonics
3
A: 2nd
2
A: 3rd
3
B: 2nd
2
B: 3rd
Receiver Harmonics
B: 2nd
2
B: 3rd
3
A: 2nd
2
A: 3rd
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Date
77
Source Harmonics
3
Report Number
Measurement
Uncertainty
(dB)
< 0 25
< 0 25
61
61
< 0 15
< 0 30
< 0 15
< 0 30
61
61
61
61
< 0 15
< 0 30
< 0 15
< 0 30
61
61
61
61
Performance Test Record 2b-19
HP 8753D Performance Test Record (18 of 18)
For 30 kHz-6 GHz Analyzers
Hewlett-Packard Company
Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006
Report Number
Serial Number
Date
Analyzer
Frequency
Ext.
Source
Freq.
16 MHz
32 MHz
16 MHz
48 MHz
31 MHz
62 MHz
31 MHz
93 MHz
61 MHz
122 MHz
61 MHz
183 MHz
121 MHz
242 MHz
121 MHz
363 MHz
180 MHz
360 MHz
180 MHz
540 MHz
310 MHz
620 MHz
310 MHz
930 MHz
700 MHz
1.4 GHz
700 MHz
2.1 GHz
1 GHz
2 GHz
1 GHz
3 GHz
1.5 GHz
3 GHz
2 GHz
4 GHz
2 GHz
6 GHz
3 GHz
6 GHz
77
16. Magnitude Frequency Response
Input A Input B Max. Di.
Power
Meter
Value
Value
Spec.
Value
2b-20 Performance Test Record
Spec.
(dB)
Meas.
Uncer.
(dB)
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.07
6 0.22
6 0.22
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:21
Contents
3.
Adjustments and Correction Constants
Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9 CC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45) . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Correction Constant (Test 46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Correction Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Intensity Correction Constants (Test 49) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Intensity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Default Intensity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Amplier Correction Constants (Test 51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADC Oset Correction Constants (Test 52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53) . . . . . . .
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Sampler Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54) . . . . . . . .
Spur Search Procedure with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spur Search Procedure without a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Number Correction Constant (Test 55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Numbers Correction Constant (Test 56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57) . . . . . . . . . .
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Retrieve Correction Constant Data from the EEPROM Backup Disk
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Focus Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8753D Option 011 with Option 1D5 Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . . . . . . . .
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants . . . . . . .
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Load Sequences from Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
3-2
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-13
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-23
3-27
3-29
3-30
3-33
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-40
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-45
3-47
3-48
3-50
3-54
3-56
3-58
3-58
3-58
Contents-1
How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments . . . . . . . .
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
Sequence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment . . . . . . . . .
Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment . . . . . . .
Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment . .
3-59
3-59
3-59
3-59
3-60
3-61
Index
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Figures
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
3-16.
3-17.
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
3-22.
3-23.
3-24.
3-25.
3-26.
Partial Component Location Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup A for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
Setup B for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
Setup C for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for IF Amplier Correction Constants . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input R Sampler Correction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input A Sampler Correction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input B Sampler Correction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Routine . .
Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Spur in Display of Five Spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Spur Almost Invisible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . .
Location of the FN VCO Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Band Adjustment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup . .
Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of A11 Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments . . . . .
Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-5
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-17
3-19
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-40
3-42
3-43
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-51
3-52
3-54
3-55
3-1. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2. Power Meter Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3-12
Tables
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Contents-3
3
Adjustments and Correction Constants
This chapter has the following adjustment procedures:
A9 CC Jumper Positions
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45)
Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
Display Intensity Correction Constants (Test 49)
IF Amplier Correction Constants (Test 51)
ADC Oset Correction Constants (Test 52)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)
Option Numbers Correction Constants (Test 56)
Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57)
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58)
EEPROM Backup
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-1
Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011
Table 3-1 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the
instrument is working correctly, following the replacement of an assembly.
Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table.
Table 3-1. Related Service Procedures
Verication
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
Replaced
Assembly
A1 Front Panel
Keyboard
A2 Front Panel
Interface
A3 Source
None
None
Internal Test 0
Internal Test 23
Internal Test 0
Internal Test 23
Output Power
Spectral Purity
(harmonics and mixer spurs)
A9 CC Jumper Positions
Source Def CC (Test 44)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
or
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54)
System Verication
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
Minimum R Level
A4/A5/A6 Samplers A9CC Jumper Positions
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) (if R sampler replaced)
Input Crosstalk
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk
Frequency Response
Input Impedance
(replace assembly only)
or
System Verication
A7 Pulse Generator
Frequency Response
A9CC Jumper Positions
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Frequency Range and Accuracy
Spectral Purity (phase noise)
EEPROM Backup Disk
or
System Verication
A8 Post Regulator
Internal Test 0
A9CC Jumper Positions
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54) Check A8 test point voltages
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
3-2 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Table 3-1 Related Service Procedures (2 of 3)
Replaced
Assembly
A9 CPU1
Firmware Rev 5.20
08753-60185
A10 Digital IF
A11 Phase Lock
1
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
Verication
Output Power
A9CC Jumper Positions
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Serial Number CC (Test 55)
Frequency Response
Option Number CC (Test 56)
Display Intensity and Focus CC (Test 49) Dynamic Accuracy
Source Def CC (Test 44)
or
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
System Verication
Cal Kit Default (Test 57)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53)
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Internal Test 0
A9CC Jumper Positions
Source Default CC 9 (Test 44)
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 47)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Receiver Noise Level
A9CC Jumper Positions
Trace Noise
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Input Crosstalk
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
or
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
System Verication
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Minimum R Level
Frequency Accuracy
If you have an EEPROM backup disk available, you only need to perform the rst three tests listed.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-3
Table 3-1 Related Service Procedures (3 of 3)
Replaced
Assembly
A12 Reference
A13 Fractional-N
(Analog)
A14 Fractional-N
(Digital)
Verication
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
A9CC Jumper Positions
High/Low Band Transition
Frequency Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
Fractional-N Spur and
FM Sideband
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
Fractional-N Frequency Range
EEPROM Backup Disk
Frequency Range and Accuracy
or
System Verication
Spectral Purity
(other spurious signals)
Frequency Range and Accuracy
Frequency Range and Accuracy
or
System Verication
A15 Preregulator
A16 Rear Panel
Interface
A17 Motherboard
A18 Display
None
None
None
Vertical Position and Focus
(only if needed)
A19 Graphics System None
Processor
3-4 Adjustments and Correction Constants
Self-Test
Internal Test 13,
Rear Panel
Self-Test
Observation of Display Tests
66 - 80
Observation of Display Tests
59 - 80
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
A9 CC Jumper Positions
1. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
2. Set the analyzer on its side.
3. Remove the two lower-rear corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with the
T-10 TORX screwdriver.
4. Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover's back edge, using a T-15 TORX
screwdriver.
5. Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
6. Move the jumper, as shown in Figure 3-1:
Move the A9 CC jumper to the ALT position, before you run any of the correction
constant adjustment routines. This is the position for altering the analyzer's correction
constants.
Move the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position, after you have run correction constant
adjustment routines. This is the position for normal operating conditions.
7. Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument.
Figure JUMP3 here.
Figure 3-1. Partial Component Location Diagram
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-5
Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This internal adjustment routine writes default correction constants for the source power
accuracy.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4445 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays *Source Def DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays *Source Def FAIL, refer to \Source Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-6 Adjustments and Correction Constants
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Source Pretune Default Correction Constants (Test 45)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning
accuracy.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4455 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays *Pretune Def DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to the \Source Troubleshooting" chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-7
Analog Bus Correction Constant (Test 46)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages: ground, +0.37 V
and +2.5 V. The calibration data is stored as correction constants in EEPROMs.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4465 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL, refer to the \Digital Control Troubleshooting"
chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-8 Adjustments and Correction Constants
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Required Equipment and Tools
Power meter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 437B or HP 438A
Power sensor : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8482A
Power sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8481A
Power splitter (2) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
Attenuator 20 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8491A Option 020
HP-IB cable : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 10833A
RF cable 24-inch : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11500B
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up Time: 30 minutes.
This procedure adjusts several correction constants that can improve the output power level
accuracy of the internal source. They are related to the power level, power slope, power slope
oset, and the ALC roll-o factors among others.
1. If you just completed \Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53),"
continue this procedure with step 8.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
3. Press 4LOCAL5 SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: P MTR/HPIB . The default power meter address
is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its HP-IB
address.
4. Press POWER MTR:438A/437 to toggle between the 438A/437 and 436A power meters.
Choose the appropriate model number.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the HP 8482A power
sensor to channel A, and the HP 8481A power sensor to channel B.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-9
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
5. Zero and calibrate the power meter and sensor.
6. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS/SENSR LISTS
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor
A (HP 8482A).
7. Build a table of up to 12 points (12 frequencies with their calibration factors). To enter
each point, follow these steps:
a. Press ADD FREQUENCY .
b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key: (4G/n5, 4M/5, or 4k/m5).
c. Press CAL FACTOR and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds to the
frequency you entered.
The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor. If you make a
mistake, press 45 and re-enter the correct value.
d. Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu:
Allows you to select a frequency point.
SEGMENT
Allows you to edit or change a previously entered value.
EDIT
Allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table.
DELETE
Allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table.
ADD
Allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table.
CLEAR LIST
Allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal
DONE
factor table.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-10 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a power sensor
calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the softkeys mentioned above.
Since sensor B is only used for 3 GHz to 6 GHz measurements, you only need to input
calibration factors for this frequency range.
9. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter and the HP 8482A power sensor.
10. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2.
8.
For Option 006 Instruments Only:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure SETUPA here.
Figure 3-2. Setup A for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
11. Press 4MENU5
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CW FREQ
.
43005 4k/m5
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-11
12. Record the power meter reading in the rst column of Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Power Meter Readings
Setup A Reading Setup B Reading Power Loss of #2
(First Reading) (Second Reading) (Enter in Analyzer)
300 kHz:
50 MHz:
1.5 GHz:
3 GHz:
6 GHz1:
1
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
minus
minus
minus
minus
minus
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
equals
equals
equals
equals
equals
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
For Option 006 instruments only.
13. Repeat the previous two steps at 50 MHz, 1.5 GHz, and 3 GHz.
14. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Make a measurement at 6 GHz by disconnecting the
HP 8482A (sensor A) from the power splitter, and replacing it with the HP 8481A (sensor
B).
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, the HP 8481A should be connected to the
meter's channel B input.
If you are using the HP 437B power meter, zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor.
15. Recongure the equipment as shown in Figure 3-3.
16. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Use the HP 8482A (sensor A) in the equipment
conguration.
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, the HP 8482A should be connected to the
meter's channel A input.
If you are using the HP 437B power meter, zero and calibrate the HP 8482A sensor.
Figure SETUPB here.
Figure 3-3. Setup B for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
3-12 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
17. Repeat the measurements at the same frequencies (300 kHz, 50 MHz,
1.5 GHz, 3 GHz) and record the power meter readings in the second column in Table 3-2.
18. For Option 006 Instruments Only: Make a measurement at 6 GHz by disconnecting the
HP 8482A (sensor A) from the power splitter, and replacing it with the HP 8481A (sensor
B).
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, the HP 8481A should be connected to the
meter's channel B input.
If you are using the HP 437B power meter, zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor.
19. Subtract the value of each frequency in the second column from the value in the rst
column, and enter the dierence in the third column.
20. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS/SENSR LISTS POWER LOSS and
enter the power loss data in the same way you entered the calibration factors.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Source Correction Routine
21. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4475 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
22. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-4, using splitter #2 and the power sensor
requested by the prompt.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Figure SETUPC here.
Figure 3-4. Setup C for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-13
23. Press CONTINUE .
24. Observe the analyzer display for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer shows SOURCE Cor DONE, press 4PRESET5 and you have completed this
procedure.
If the analyzer fails this routine, refer to \Source Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-14 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase-locked loop operation.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4485 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays Pretune Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to \Source Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-15
Display Intensity Correction Constants (Test 49)
Required Equipment and Tools
Photometer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Tektronix J16 photometer
Probe : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Tektronix J6503
Light occluder : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Tektronix 016-0305-00
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Photometer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
There are three display intensity adjustments:
background
maximum
operating default
If either the A19 GSP, A9 CPU or A18 display assemblies are replaced, perform a visual
inspection of the display. If it appears to need an adjustment, then proceed with the following
procedures:
Note
This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only by qualied
personnel.
1. Set the photometer probe to NORMAL. Press 4POWER5 on the photometer to switch it on
to allow 30 minutes of warm-up time.
Background Adjustment
2. In a dimly lit room (or with the analyzer display shaded from bright lights), press 4PRESET5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4495 4x15.
3. The display should show Intensity Cor - ND -.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The display could be so far out of adjustment that the annotation would be
very dicult to read.
3-16 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
4. Press EXECUTE TEST and YES at the prompt to alter the correction constants.
Alternating vertical bars of three dierent intensities will be drawn on the display. Each
bar has a number written below it: 0, 1, or 2.
5. Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the vertical bar labeled \1" is just barely
visible against the black border. Vertical bar \0" must not be visible.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Maximum Intensity Adjustment
This adjustment ensures that the light output at the 100% intensity level is equal to, or less
than 150 Nits. The level is set using a photometer to measure the output light.
Caution
If you operate the display at intensities higher than 150 Nits, you may reduce
the life of the display.
6. Press the top softkey. The analyzer display should have an all white screen.
7. Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer's instructions.
8. Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure INTENSE here.
Figure 3-5. Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup
Note
The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed. The glass lter
transmits 60% of the display light, therefore 90 Nits would be 150 Nits
without the bezel installed.
9. Adjust the analyzer front panel knob to the maximum (clockwise) position.
If the photometer registers greater than 90 Nits (or 150 Nits without the bezel),
turn the front panel knob until a reading of no more than 90 Nits, registers on the
photometer.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-17
If the photometer registers a reading of less than 90 Nits (or 150 Nits without the
bezel), and greater than 60 Nits (or 100 without the bezel), proceed to \Operating
Default Intensity Adjustment."
If the photometer registers a reading of less than 60 Nits (or 100 Nits without the
bezel), the display is faulty.
Operating Default Intensity Adjustment
This adjustment sets the preset default level of the display intensity. If you switch the
power o and on, the analyzer uses this default level to ensure that the display is visible and
eliminates concern that the display may not be functioning.
10. Press the top softkey on the analyzer to bring up the next display adjustment mode.
11. Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 3-5.
12. Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the photometer registers 60 Nits (or 100 Nits
without bezel installed).
13. Press the top softkey on the analyzer and observe the display:
If DONE is displayed on the analyzer, the adjustment is done. This completes the series
of three Display Intensity Adjustment Procedures.
If FAIL is displayed on the analyzer, repeat the three \Display Intensity Correction
Constants (Test 49)." If the analyzer still fails the adjustment routine, refer to the
\Start Troubleshooting Here" chapter to isolate the problem.
3-18 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
IF Amplifier Correction Constants (Test 51)
Required Equipment and Tools
Power splitter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
RF cable (2) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11500B
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up Time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment routine measures the gain of the IF ampliers (A and B only) located on the
A10 digital IF, to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy.
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-6, using the analyzer's A input.
Figure IFAMP here.
Figure 3-6. Setup for IF Amplifier Correction Constants
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4515 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE .
3. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-6, using the analyzer's B input.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-19
4. Press CONTINUE and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If DONE is displayed, you have completed this procedure.
If FAIL is displayed, check that the RF cables are connected from the power splitter to R
input and A (or B) input. Then repeat this adjustment routine.
If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, refer to the \Digital Control
Troubleshooting" chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-20 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
ADC Offset Correction Constants (Test 52)
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the most
linear part of the ADC quantizing curve.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4525 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNN
This routine takes about three minutes.
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL, refer to the \Digital Control" chapter.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-21
Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Required Equipment and Tools
Power meter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 437B or HP 438A
Power sensor : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8482A
Power sensor (for Option 006 analyzers) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8481A
Power splitter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
RF cable set (2) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11500B
HP-IB cable : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 10833A
Adapter type-N (m) to type-N (m) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 1250-1475
Adapter type-N (f) to type-N (f) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 1250-1472
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment procedure corrects the overall atness of the microwave components that
make up the analyzer receiver and test separation sections. This is necessary for the HP
8753D Option 011 to meet the published test port atness.
1. If you just completed \Source Correction Constants (Test 47)," continue this procedure
with step 8.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM CONTROLLER .
3. Press 4LOCAL5 SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: P MTR/HPIB . The default power meter address
is 13. Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its HP-IB
address.
4. Press POWER MTR:438A/437 to toggle between the 438A/437 and 436A power meters.
Choose the appropriate model number.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, connect the HP 8482A power
sensor to channel A, and for Option 006, connect the HP 8481A power sensor
to channel B.
3-22 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry
5. Press 4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS/SENSR LISTS
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
A (HP 8482A).
6. Build a table of up to twelve points (twelve frequencies with their calibration factors). To
enter each point, follow these steps:
a. Press ADD FREQUENCY .
b. Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key: 4G/n5, 4M/5, or 4k/m5.
c. Press CAL FACTOR and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds to the
frequency you entered.
The calibration factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor. If you
make a mistake, press 45 and re-enter the correct value.
d. Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point.
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu :
Allows you to select a frequency point.
SEGMENT
Allows you to edit or change a previously entered value.
EDIT
Allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table.
DELETE
Allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table.
ADD
Allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table.
CLEAR LIST
Allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal
DONE
factor table.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a power sensor
calibration table for power sensor B (HP 8481A), using the softkeys mentioned above.
Since sensor B is only used for 3 GHz to 6 GHz measurements, you only need to input
calibration factors for this frequency range.
8. Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor.
7.
For Option 006 Instruments Only:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Update Sampler Correction Constants
9. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter and HP 8482A (sensor A).
10. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4535 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
11. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-7.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-23
Figure SAMPR here.
Figure 3-7. Input R Sampler Correction Setup
12. Press CONTINUE .
The analyzer starts the rst part of the automatic adjustment. This part will take about
seven minutes.
13. For Option 006 Instruments Only: After the analyzer has nished the rst part of the
adjustment, disconnect the HP 8482A (sensor A) from the power splitter, and replace it
with the HP 8481A (sensor B) for the 6 GHz measurement.
If you are using the HP 438A power meter, the HP 8481A should be connected to the
meter's channel B input.
If you are using the HP 437B power meter, zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor.
14. Press CONTINUE .
15. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-8. Use two cables of equal electrical length
at the power splitter outputs.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-24 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Figure SAMPA here.
Figure 3-8. Input A Sampler Correction Setup
16. Press
CONTINUE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
The analyzer starts the second part of the automatic adjustment.
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-25
17. Follow the analyzer prompt to move the cable from input A to input B, as shown in
Figure 3-9.
Figure SAMPB here.
Figure 3-9. Input B Sampler Correction Setup
18. Press CONTINUE . The analyzer starts the third part of the automatic adjustment.
19. When the analyzer completes the adjustment, observe the display:
If the analyzer shows DONE, this procedure is complete.
If the analyzer shows FAIL, press 4PRESET5 and then repeat this entire procedure
(\Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants"). If the analyzer shows FAIL
again, refer to the \Receiver Troubleshooting" chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-26 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
Required Equipment and Tools
Low pass lter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9135-0198
Power splitter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
Attenuator 20 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8491A Option 020
RF cable set : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11851B
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up Time: 30 minutes.
The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2.982 GHz, but it varies with temperature.
This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity oscillator at a particular
temperature by identifying a known spur.
Note
You should perform this procedure with the recommended lter, or a lter
with at least 50 dB of rejection at 2.9 GHz and a passband which includes
800 MHz. The lter makes spur identication substantially faster and more
reliable.
With the lter, you need to distinguish between only two spurs, each of which should be 10
dB to 20 dB (3 to 4 divisions) above the trace noise.
Without the lter, you need to distinguish the target spur between four or ve spurs, each of
which may be 0.002 to 0.010 dB (invisible to 2 divisions) above or below the trace noise.
Perform the rst ve steps of the procedure at least once for familiarization before trying to
select the target spur (especially if you are not using a lter).
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-27
1. Connect the equipment shown in Figure 3-10.
Figure CAVOSC here.
Figure 3-10. Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Routine
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4545 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
During this adjustment routine, you will see several softkeys:
Sweeps the current frequency span: you may press it repeatedly for
CONTINUE
additional sweeps of the current frequency span.
Sweeps the next frequency span (2 MHz higher).
NEXT
Enters the value of the marker which you have placed on the spur and exits
SELECT
the routine.
ABORT
Exits the routine.
3. Press CONTINUE to sweep the rst frequency span three times. Each new span overlaps the
previous span by 3 MHz (the center frequency increases by 2 MHz; the span is 5 MHz).
Therefore, anything visible on the right half of the screen of one set of sweeps will appear
on the left half or center of the screen when you press NEXT .
4. Press NEXT repeatedly. Watch the trace on each sweep and try to spot the target spur.
With the lter, the target spur will be one of two obvious spurs. See Figure 3-11). Without
the lter (not recommended), the target spur will be one of four or ve less distinct spurs
as shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13. When the center frequency increases to 2994.999
MHz, and you have not \selected" the target spur, Cav Osc Cor FAIL will appear on the
display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-28 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Figure TARGET here.
Figure 3-11. Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter
Spur Search Procedure with a Filter
5. Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to observe and
mark the target spur. The target spur will appear to the right of a second spur, similar to
Figure 3-11.
6. Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the spur and then press SELECT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-29
7. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer does not display DONE, repeat this procedure.
If the analyzer continues not to display DONE, refer to the \Source Troubleshooting"
chapter.
Spur Search Procedure without a Filter
8. Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to observe and
mark the target spur.
The target spur will appear in many variations. Often it will be dicult to identify
positively; occasionally it will be nearly impossible to identify. Do not hesitate to press
CONTINUE as many times as necessary to thoroughly inspect the current span.
The target spur usually appears as one of a group of four evenly spaced spurs as in
Figure 3-12. The target spur is on the right most spur (fourth from the left). On any
particular sweep, one, any, or all of the spurs may be large, small, visible, invisible, above
or below the reference line.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure TARGET1 here.
Figure 3-12. Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter
3-30 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
On occasion the largest spur appears as one of a group of ve evenly spaced spurs as shown in
Figure 3-13. The target spur is again the fourth from the left (not the fth, right-most spur).
Figure TARGET2 here.
Figure 3-13. Target Spur in Display of Five Spurs
Figure 3-14 shows another variation of the basic four spur pattern: some up, some down, and
the target spur itself almost indistinguishable.
Figure TARGET3 here.
Figure 3-14. Target Spur Almost Invisible
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-31
9. Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the target spur. Then press
and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer displays FAIL, refer to the \Source Troubleshooting" chapter.
3-32 Adjustments and Correction Constants
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SELECT
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Serial Number Correction Constant (Test 55)
Analyzer warm-up time: 5 minutes.
This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs.
Caution
Perform this procedure ONLY if the A9 CPU assembly has been replaced.
1. Record the ten character serial number that is on the analyzer real panel identication
label.
2. Press 4PRESET5 DISPLAY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE to erase the HP logo.
3. Enter the serial number by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each
character of the instrument serial number, and then pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each
letter. Enter a total of ten characters: four digits, one letter, and ve nal digits.
Press BACKSPACE if you made a mistake.
4. Press DONE when you have nished entering the title.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Caution
Mistakes CANNOT be corrected after step 5 is performed, unless you contact
the factory for a clear serial number keyword. Then you must perform the
\Options Correction Constants" procedure and repeat this procedure.
5. Press 4SYSTEM5
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU TESTS
4555 4x15
EXECUTE TEST YES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-33
6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine:
If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE, you have completed this
procedure.
If the analyzer does not display DONE, then either the serial number entered in steps 3
and 4 did not match the required format or a serial number was already stored. Check
the serial number recognized by the analyzer:
a. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION .
b. Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen.
c. Rerun this adjustment test.
If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine, contact your nearest HP Sales
and Service oce.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-34 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Option Numbers Correction Constant (Test 56)
This procedure stores instrument option(s) information in A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs. You
can also use this procedure to remove a serial number or install an option, with the unique as
referred to in \Serial Number Correction Constant."
1. Remove the instrument top cover and record the keyword label(s) that are on the display
assembly. Note that each keyword is for EACH option installed in the instrument.
If the instrument does not have a label, then contact your nearest HP Sales and Service
oce. Be sure to include the full serial number of the instrument.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4DISPLAY5 MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE .
3. Enter the keyword by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each
character of the keyword, and then pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each letter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press
4. Press
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
BACKSPACE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Caution
DONE
if you made a mistake.
when you have nished entering the title.
Do not confuse \I" with \1" or \O" with \0" (zero).
5. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4565 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
6. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays Option Cor DONE, you have completed this procedure.
If the analyzer has more than one option, repeat steps 2 through 6 to install the
remaining option(s).
If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL, check the keyword used in step 3 and make
sure it is correct. Pay special attention to the letters \I" or \0", the numbers \1" or \0"
(zero). Repeat this entire adjustment test.
If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine, contact your nearest HP service
oce.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-35
Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57)
This internal adjustment test writes default calibration kit denitions (device model
coecients) into EEPROM's.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4575 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine:
If the analyzer displays Cal Kit Def DONE, press 4PRESET5, and you have completed this
procedure.
If the analyzer does not display DONE, contact your nearest HP Sales and Service oce.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-36 Adjustments and Correction Constants
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Initialize EEPROMs (Test 58)
This service internal test performs the following functions:
destroys all correction constants and all un-protected options
initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes
replaces the display intensity correction constants with default values
Note
This routine WILL NOT alter the serial number or Options 002, 006 and 010
correction constants.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4585 4x15 EXECUTE TEST YES .
2. Restore the analyzer options in the EEPROMs:
If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk, perform these steps:
a. Place the disk in the analyzer disk drive and press 4SAVE/RECALL5 SELECT DISK
INTERNAL DISK .
b. Use the front panel knob to highlight the lename that represents your serial number.
c. Press RETURN RECALL STATE 4PRESET5.
If you don't have the correction constants backed up on a disk, run all the internal
service routines in the following order:
1. Display Intensity Correction Constants (Test 49)
2. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
3. Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 45)
4. Analog Bus Correction Constants (Test 46)
5. Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)
6. Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants (Test 57)
7. ADC Oset Correction Constants (Test 52)
8. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
9. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
10. IF Amplier Correction Constants (Test 51)
11. Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants (Test 54)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-37
EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure
Required Equipment and Tools
3.5-inch oppy disk : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 92192A (box of 10)
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
The correction constants, that are unique to your instrument, are stored in EEPROM on the
A9 controller assembly. By creating an EEPROM backup disk, you will have a copy of all the
correction constant data should you need to replace or repair the A9 assembly.
1. Insert a 3.5-inch disk into the analyzer disk drive.
2. If the disk is not formatted, follow these steps:
a. Press 4SAVE/RECALL5 FILE UTILITIES FORMAT DISK .
b. Select the format type:
To format a LIF disk, select FORMAT:LIF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To format a DOS disk, select
c. Press
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORMAT INT DISK
3. Press 4SYSTEM5
FORMAT:DOS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
and answer
NNNNNNNNNNN
YES
at the query.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE STORE EEPR ON
SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK RETURN SAVE STATE .
4SAVE/RECALL5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
The analyzer creates a default le \FILE0". The lename appears in the
upper-left corner of the display. The le type \ISTATE(E)" indicates that the
le is an instrument-state with EEPROM backup.
4. Press FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE . Use the front panel knob and
the SELECT LETTER softkey (or an external keyboard) to rename the le \FILE0" TO
\N12345 " where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the instrument's serial number. (The
rst character in the lename must be a letter.) When you are nished renaming the le,
press DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-38 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
5. Write the following information on the disk label:
analyzer serial number
today's date
\EEPROM Backup Disk"
How to Retrieve Correction Constant Data from the EEPROM Backup Disk
1. Insert the \EEPROM Backup Disk" into the analyzer disk drive.
2. Make sure the A9 CC jumper is in the ALTER position.
3. Press 4SAVE/RECALL5 SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK . Use the front panel knob to highlight
the le \N12345" where N12345 represents the le name of the EEPROM data for the
analyzer. On the factory shipped EEPROM backup disk, the lename is FILE1.
4. Press RETURN RECALL STATE to down load the correction constants data into the
instrument EEPROM's.
5. Perform \Serial Number Correction Constants (Test 55)", and if applicable, \Option
Numbers Correction Constant (Test 56)."
6. Press 4PRESET5 and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by performing a
simple measurement.
7. Move the A9 CC jumper back to its NORMAL position when you are done working with
the instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-39
Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments
Required Equipment and Tools
Torx screwdriver T-15
Non-conductive at head screwdriver,-2 inches : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
Use this procedure to adjust the vertical position and focus of the analyzer color display.
Caution
These are the only display adjustments. Any other adjustments to the color
display will void the warranty.
Vertical Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove the left-rear bumpers and left side panel.
Figure VERT here.
Figure 3-15. Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Locations
2. Insert the at head screw driver into the vertical position hole.
3. Adjust the control until the softkey labels are aligned with the softkeys.
Focus Adjustment Procedure
4. Use the screw driver from step 3 to adjust the focus until the display has the most
readability.
3-40 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Display Degaussing (Demagnetizing)
Required Equipment and Tools
Any CRT demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
As with all color monitors, the display is very susceptible to external magnetic elds. These
elds can originate from many sources, including unshielded motors, metal frame tables, and
from the earth itself. The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming of the display
usually near the top left corner of the display. If this problem is observed, remove the device
causing the magnetic eld.
In extreme cases, a total color shift may be observed; for example, a trace that was red may
shift to green. This does not indicate a problem with the display; it is characteristic of all
color displays.
In countries that use 50 Hz AC power, some 10 Hz jitters may be noticed.
1. If the display becomes magnetized, or if color purity is a problem, cycle the analyzer power
several times. Leave the instrument o for at least 15 seconds before turning it on. This
will activate the automatic degaussing circuitry in the display.
2. If the display color purity is still a problem, you must use a commercially available
demagnetizer such as a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions keeping in mind of the following:
At the rst pass, do NOT place the demagnetizer closer than 4 inches (10 cm) from the
face of the display while demagnetizing the display.
At the second pass, if you did not completely demagnetize the display, move the
demagnetizer to a slightly closer distance until the display is demagnetized.
Caution
If you apply an excessively strong magnetic eld to the display face, you can
permanently destroy the display.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-41
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
TORX screwdriver T-15
Non-metallic adjustment tool : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes
This procedure centers the fractional-N VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) in its tuning range
to insure reliable operation of the instrument.
1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and the right side cover, using the torx screwdriver.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4DISPLAY5 DUAL CHAN ON 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MENU5
NUMBER of POINTS 4115 4x15 COUPLED CH OFF .
3. Press 4START5 4365 4M/5 4STOP5 460.755 4M/5 4MENU5 SWEEP TIME 412.55 4k/m5 4MEAS5
S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 4295 4x15 to observe the \FN VCO Tun" voltage.
4. Press 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 4SCALE REF5 4.65 4x15 REFERENCE VALUE 4-75 4x15 to set and scale
channel 1. Press 4MARKER5 to set the marker to the far right of the graticule.
5. Press 4CHAN 25 4MENU5 CW FREQ 431.00015 4M/5 SWEEP TIME 412.3755 4k/m5 4MEAS5
S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 4295 4x15 to observe the \FN VCO Tun" voltage.
6. Press 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 4SCALE REF5 4.25 4x15 REFERENCE VALUE 46.775 4x15 4MARKER5 465
4k/m5 to set channel 2 and its marker.
7. Adjust the \FN VCO ADJ" (see Figure 3-16) with a non-metallic tool so that the channel
1 marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker is below it.
See Figure 3-17.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure FNVCO here.
Figure 3-16. Location of the FN VCO Adjustment
3-42 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Figure RANGE here.
Figure 3-17. Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment Display
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-43
8. To ne-tune this adjustment, press 4PRESET5 4MENU5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON
9. Press 4MEAS5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
REAL
4SCALE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CW FREQ
4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU
to set \FRAC N TUNE" to 29.2 MHz.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input
REF5 REFERENCE VALUE 475 4x15.
4295 4x15 4MARKER5 4FORMAT5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment:
If the marker value is less than 7, you have completed this procedure.
If the marker value is greater than 7, readjust \FN VCO ADJ" to 7. Then perform
steps 2 to 10 to conrm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and
below the reference line respectively.
If you cannot adjust the analyzer correctly, replace the A14 board assembly.
3-44 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Frequency Accuracy Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Spectrum analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8563E
Power splitter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
RF cable 24-inch (2) : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11500B
Non-metallic adjustment tool : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8830-0024
TORX screwdriver T-15
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment sets the VCXO (voltage controlled crystal oscillator) frequency to maintain
the instrument's frequency accuracy.
1. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and analyzer top cover, using the torx screwdriver.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-18.
Figure FREQACC here.
Figure 3-18. Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup
Note
Make sure that the spectrum analyzer and network analyzer references are
NOT connected.
3.
For Option 1D5 Instruments Only: Remove the BNC to BNC jumper that is connected
between the \EXT REF" and the \10 MHz Precision Reference," as shown in Figure 3-20.
4. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:
Center Frequency
2.9 GHz (or 5.9 GHz for Option 006)
Frequency Span
50 kHz
Reference Level
+10 dBm
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-45
5. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4PRESET5 4MENU5 CW FREQ 42.95 4G/n5 (or 45.95 4G/n5 for
Option 006).
6. No adjustment is required when the spectrum analyzer measures 2.9 GHz 6;5 kHz (or 5.9
GHz 6 5 kHz for Option 006). Otherwise, locate the A12 assembly (red extractors) and
adjust the VCXO ADJ for a spectrum analyzer center frequency measurement of 6 5 kHz.
See Figure 3-19.
7. Replace the A12 assembly if you are unable to adjust the frequency as specied. Repeat
this adjustment test.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure VCXO here.
Figure 3-19. Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment
3-46 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
HP 8753D Option 011 with Option 1D5 Only
8. Connect the BNC to BNC jumper between the \EXT REF" and the \10 MHz Precision
Reference" as shown in Figure 3-20.
9. Use a at-head screwdriver to remove the screw that covers the precision frequency
adjustment as shown in Figure 3-20. Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the precision
frequency reference potentiometer for a spectrum analyzer center frequency measurement
of 65 Hz.
Figure OPT1D5 here.
Figure 3-20. High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location
10. Replace the A26 board assembly if you cannot adjust for a center frequency measurement
of 650 Hz.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-47
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Non-metallic adjustment tool : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8830-0024
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment centers the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator) of the A12 reference assembly
for high and low band operations.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4START5 4115 4M/5 4STOP5 4215 4M/5
to observe part of both the low and high bands on the analog bus.
2. Press 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 4225 4x15 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
4DISPLAY5 DATAMEM DATA-MEMORY to subtract the ground voltage from the next
measurement.
3. Press 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 4235 4x15 4MARKER5 4115 4M/5.
4. Press 4SCALE REF5 4.15 4x15 and observe the VCO tuning trace:
If the left half of trace = 0 61000 mV and right half of trace = 100 to 200 mV higher
(one to two divisions), no adjustment is necessary. See Figure 3-21.
If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and top cover, using a torx screwdriver.
b. Adjust the VCO tune (see Figure 3-22) to position the left half of the trace to 0 6125
mV. This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could easily go o of the
screen.
c. Adjust the HBLB (see Figure 3-22) to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175
mV (about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.
Refer to \Source Troubleshooting" if you cannot perform the adjustment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure HIGHLOW here.
Figure 3-21. High/Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace
3-48 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Figure HLADJ here.
Figure 3-22. High/Low Band Adjustment Locations
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-49
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
Spectrum analyzer : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8563E
Power splitter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11667A Option 001
Attenuator 10 dB : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 8491A Option 010
BNC cable : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8120-1840
HP-IB cable : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 10833A/B/C/D
RF cable set : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP 11851B
Non-metallic adjustment tool : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8830-0024
TORX screwdriver T-15
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API (analog phase interpolator, on the
fractional-N assembly) circuits. It also improves the sideband characteristics.
3-50 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3-23.
2. Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP-IB addresses:
HP 8753D Option 011 = 16, Spectrum Analyzer = 18.
Figure FRACSPUR here.
Figure 3-23. Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup
3. Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows:
Reference Level
0 dBm
Resolution Bandwidth
100 Hz
Center Frequency
676.145105 MHz
Span
2.5 kHz
4. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4PRESET5 4MENU5 CW FREQ 4676.0451055 4M/5.
5. Remove the upper-rear corner bumpers and the top cover, using a torx screwdriver.
6. Adjust the 100 kHz (R77) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer. The
minimum signal may, or may not, drop down into the noise oor.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-51
Figure API here.
Figure 3-24. Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments
7. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.051105 MHz.
8. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 4676.0481055 4M/5.
9. Adjust the API1 (R35) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
10. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.007515 MHz.
11. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 4676.0045155 4M/5.
12. Adjust the API2 (R43) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
13. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003450 MHz.
14. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 4676.000455 4M/5.
15. Adjust the API3 (R45) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
16. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency for 676.003045 MHz.
17. On the HP 8753D Option 011, press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 4676.0000455 4M/5.
18. Adjust the API4 (R47) for a null (minimum amplitude) on the spectrum analyzer.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-52 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
In Case of Diculty
If this adjustment can not be performed satisfactorily, repeat the entire procedure. Or else
replace the A13 board assembly.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-53
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment
Required Equipment and Tools
TORX screwdriver T-15
BNC alligator clip adapter : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8120-1292
BNC to BNC cable : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 8120-1840
Antistatic wrist strap : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-1367
Antistatic wrist strap cord : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0980
Static-control table mat and earth ground wire : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : HP P/N 9300-0797
Analyzer warm-up time: 30 minutes.
This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO (YIG oscillator) and the cavity oscillator
when they are frequency oset to avoid spurs. Optimizing YO-cavity oscillator tracking
reduces potential phase-locked loop problems.
1. Remove the upper-rear corner bumpers and top cover, using a torx screwdriver.
2. Mate the adapter to the BNC cable and connect the BNC connector end to AUX INPUT
on the analyzer rear panel. Connect the BNC center conductor alligator-clip to A11 TP10
(labeled ERR); the shield clip to A11 TP1 (GND) as shown in Figure 3-25.
Figure A11CAV here.
Figure 3-25. Location of A11 Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments
3-54 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
3. Press 4PRESET5 4CENTER5 44005 4M/5 4SPAN5 4505 4M/5.
4. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS
ANALOG IN Aux Input 4115 4x15.
5. Press 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 4SCALE REF5 4105 4k/m5 MARKERREFERENCE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Observe the phase locked loop error voltage:
If \spikes" are not visible on the analyzer display (see Figure 3-26), no adjustment is
necessary.
If \spikes" are excessive (see Figure 3-26),adjust the CAV ADJ potentiometer on the A3
source bias assembly to eliminate the spikes. See Figure 3-25.
If the \spikes" persist, refer to the \Source Troubleshooting" chapter.
Figure SPIKES here.
Figure 3-26. Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-55
Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants
Analyzer warm-up Time: None.
This procedure stores the instrument's unprotected option(s) information in A9 CPU
assembly EEPROMs.
1. Make sure the A9 CC jumper is in the ALT (ALTER) position.
2. Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the analyzer.
3. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU PEEK/POKE PEEK/POKE ADDRESS .
4. Refer to the table below for the address of each unprotected hardware option. Enter the
address for the specic installed hardware option that needs to be enabled or disabled.
Follow the address entry by POKE 4015 4x15.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Pressing
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Pressing
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
POKE
POKE
0
4 15 4x15
405 4x15
after an entry enables the option.
after an entry disables the option.
Hardware
Options
PEEK/POKE
Address
1D5
5243250
011
5243256
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to enable.
3-56 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
6. After you have entered all of the instrument's hardware options, press the following keys:
4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION
7. View the analyzer display for the listed options.
8. When you have entered all of the hardware options, return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM
(NORMAL) position.
9. Perform the \EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure" located on page 3-42.
In Case of Diculty
If any of the installed options are missing from the list, return to step 2 and reenter the
missing option(s).
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-57
Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments
The network analyzer has the capability of automating tasks through a sequencing function.
The following adjustment sequences are available through InterNet.
Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
How to Load Sequences from Disk
1. Place the sequence disk in the analyzer disk drive.
2. Press 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM CONTROLLER 4SEQUENCE5 MORE LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK
READ SEQUENCE FILE TITLES .
3. Select any or all of the following sequence les by pressing:
Select LOAD SEQ APIADJ if you want to load the le for the \Fractional-N Spur
Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment."
Select LOAD SEQ HBLBADJ if you want to load the le for the \High/Low Band
Transition Adjustment."
Select LOAD SEQ FNADJ and LOAD SEQ FNCHK if you want to load the les for the
\Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
1. Remove the right-rear bumpers and right side cover. This exposes the adjustment location
in the sheet metal.
2. Press 4PRESET5 SEQUENCE X FNADJ (where X is the sequence number).
3. Adjust the \FN VCO TUNE" with a non-metallic tool so that the channel 1 marker is as
many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker is below it.
4. Press 4PRESET5 SEQUENCE X FNCHK (where X is the sequence number).
If the marker value is <7, you have completed this procedure.
If the marker value is >7, readjust \FN VCO TUNE" to 7. Then repeat steps 2, 3, and
4 to conrm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and below the
reference line respectively.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-58 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
How to Set Up the High/Low Band Transition Adjustments
1. Press 4PRESET5 SEQ X HBLBADJ (where X is the sequence number).
2. Observe the VCO tuning trace:
If the left half of trace = 0 61000 mV and right half of the trace = 100 to 200 mV higher
(one to two divisions), no adjustment is necessary.
If the adjustment is necessary, follow these steps:
a. Remove the upper-rear bumpers and top cover, using a torx screwdriver.
b. Adjust the VCO tune (A12 C85) to position the left half of the trace to 0 6125 mV.
This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could easily go o of the screen.
c. Adjust the HBLB (A12 R68) to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175 mV
(about 1 to 1.5 divisions) higher than the left half.
Refer to \Source Troubleshooting" if you cannot perform the adjustment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
How to Set Up the Fractional-N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband
Adjustment
1. Press 4PRESET5 SEQUENCE X APIADJ (where X is the sequence number).
2. Remove the upper-rear corner bumpers and the top cover, using a torx screwdriver.
3. Follow the directions on the analyzer display and make all of the API adjustments.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Sequence Contents
Sequence for the High/Low Band Transition Adjustment
|Sequence HBLBADJ sets the hi-band to low-band switch point.|
PRESET
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
START 11 M/u
STOP 21 M/u
MEAS
ANALOG IN 22 x1 (A12 GND)
DISPLAY
DATA > MEM
DATA - MEM
MEAS
ANALOG IN 23 x1 (VCO TUNE)
MKR 11 M/u
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-59
SCALE/REF .1 x1
Sequences for the Fractional-N Frequency Range Adjustment
|Sequence FNADJ sets up A14 (FRAC N Digital) VCO.|
DISPLAY
DUAL CHAN ON
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
MENU
NUMBER OF POINTS 11 x1
COUPLED CHAN OFF
START 36 M/u
STOP 60.75 M/u
MENU
SWEEP TIME 12.5 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1 (FN VCO TUN)
SCALE/REF .6 x1
REF VALUE -7 x1
MKR
CH 2
MENU
CW FREQ 31.0001 M/u
SWEEP TIME 12.375 k/m
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1 (FN VCO TUN)
SCALE/REF .2 x1
REF VALUE 6.77 x1
MKR 6 k/m
|Sequence FNCHK checks the VCO adjustment.|
MENU
CW FREQ 1 G/n
SYSTEM
SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS ON
SERVICE MODES
FRAC N TUNE ON
MEAS
ANALOG IN 29 x1
MKR
SCALE/REF
REF VALUE 7 x1
3-60 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Sequences for the Fractional-N Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment
|Sequence APIADJ sets up the fractional-N API spur adjustments.|
TITLE
S 2.5K
PERIPHERAL HPIB ADDR
18 x1
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
AT 0DB
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
RM 100HZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
CF 676.145105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.045105M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 100KHZ
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.048105MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
TITLE
ADJ A13 API1
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.007515MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.004515M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API2
SEQUENCE
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Adjustments and Correction Constants 3-61
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.003450MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.000450M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API3
SEQUENCE
PAUSE
TITLE
CF 676.003045MZ
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
WAIT x
0 x1
CW FREQ
676.000045M/u
TITLE
ADJ A13 API4
3-62 Adjustments and Correction Constants
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:11
Contents
4.
Start Troubleshooting Here
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . .
Having Your Analyzer Serviced . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Initial Observations . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test . . . . . . . . .
If the Self-Test Failed . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Operator's Check . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the Operator's Check Failed . . . . . . . .
Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check . . . . . . . . . .
If Using a Plotter or Printer . . . . . . . . . .
If Using an External Disk Drive . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers . . . .
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Rear Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs . . . . . . .
Digital Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observe the Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . .
Verify Internal Tests Passed . . . . . . . . . .
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . .
Check Source Output Power . . . . . . . . . .
No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS .
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observe the R, A, and B Input Traces . . . . . .
Receiver Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faulty Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Contents-1
Figures
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
Preset Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator's Check Setup . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Organization . . . . . . .
A15 Preregulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Power Up Sequence . . . . . .
Equipment Setup for Source Power Check . .
ABUS Node 16: 1V/GHz . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Measurement Trace . . . . . . . .
HP 8753D Option 011 Overall Block Diagram
Contents-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-3
4-5
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-20
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
4
Start Troubleshooting Here
The information in this chapter helps you:
Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault.
Locate the specic troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at
fault.
To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault, follow these procedures:
Step 1. Initial Observations
Step 2. Operator's Check
Step 3. HP-IB System Check
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Option 011
Network Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
Having Your Analyzer Serviced
The HP 8753D Option 011 has a one year on-site warranty, where available. If the analyzer
should fail any of the following checks, call your local HP Sales and Service oce. A customer
engineer will be dispatched to service your analyzer on-site. If a customer engineer is not
available in your area, follow the steps below to send your analyzer back to HP for repair.
1. Choose the nearest HP service center. (A table listing of Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service
Oces is provided at the end of this guide.)
2. Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message.
3. Ship the analyzer, using the original or comparable anti-static packaging materials.
4-2 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Step 1. Initial Observations
Initiate the Analyzer Self-Test
1. Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer (including all test set
interconnects).
2. Switch on the analyzer and press 4PRESET5.
3. Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4-1 to determine if the analyzer is operating
correctly.
Figure ORDER4 here.
Figure 4-1. Preset Sequence
If the Self-Test Failed
Check the AC line power to the analyzer.
Check the fuse (rating listed on rear panel, spare inside holder).
Check the line voltage setting (use small screwdriver to change).
If the problem persists, refer to \Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-3
Step 2. Operator's Check
This procedure veries with 80% condence that the analyzer is functioning properly.
Equipment
20 dB attenuator
RF cable set
Two-way power splitter
HP 8491A Option 020
HP 11851B
HP 11667A Option 001
:::: ::::: ::::: :::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::::
:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
:::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::::: :::: ::::: ::::: ::::: ::
Procedure
1. Switch on the analyzer for a 30 minute warm-up.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4215 4215. When \TEST 21 R&A Op
Check" appears on the analyzer display, press EXECUTE TEST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4-4 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
3. At the prompt, connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-2, with power to inputs R and
A. Press CONTINUE as prompted until the analyzer displays PASS or FAIL.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure OCS4 here.
Figure 4-2. Operator's Check Setup
4. Press 4225 4215 to access the input R and B operator's check. When the title appears, press
EXECUTE TEST . Move the RF cable from input A to B. Press CONTINUE as prompted until
the analyzer displays PASS or FAIL.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the Operator's Check Failed
Recheck the equipment conguration and connections; if necessary, retest.
Conrm that the attenuator, splitter and cables meet their published specications.
Visually inspect the connectors. Retest or refer to \Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation" as
indicated.
Step 3. HP-IB Systems Check
Check the analyzer's HP-IB functions with a known working passive peripheral (such as a
plotter, printer, or disk drive).
1. Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good HP-IB cable.
2. Press 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM CONTROLLER to enable the analyzer to control the peripheral.
3. Then press SET ADDRESSES and the appropriate softkeys to verify that the device
addresses will be recognized by the analyzer. The factory default addresses are:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-5
Note
Device
HP-IB Address
HP 8753D
Plotter port { HP-IB
Printer port { HP-IB
Disk (external)
Controller
Power meter { HP-IB
16
5
1
0
21
13
You may use other addresses with two provisions:
Each device must have its own address.
The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the
analyzer (and displayed).
Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch. Refer to the
manual of the peripheral to read or change its address.
If Using a Plotter or Printer
1. Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly:
power is on
pens and paper loaded
pinch wheels are down
some plotters need to have P1 and P2 positions set
2. Press 4COPY5 and then PLOT or PRINT MONOCHROME .
If the result is a copy of the analyzer display, the printing/plotting features are functional
in the analyzer. Continue with \Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals",
\Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers", or the \Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation"
section in this chapter.
If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display, suspect the HP-IB function of the
analyzer. Refer to Chapter 6, \Digital Control Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If Using an External Disk Drive
1. Select the external disk drive. Press 4SAVE/RECALL5 SELECT DISK EXTERNAL DISK .
2. Verify that the address is set correctly. Press 4LOCAL5 SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS:DISK .
3. Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly:
power is on
an initialized disk in the correct drive
correct disk unit number and volume number (press 4LOCAL5 to access the softkeys that
display the numbers; default is 0 for both)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4-6 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
with hard disk (Winchester) drives, make sure the conguration switch is properly set
(see drive manual)
4. Press 4START5 415 4M/5 4SAVE/RECALL5 SAVE STATE . Then press 4PRESET5 4SAVE/RECALL5
RECALL STATE .
If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz, HP-IB is functional in the analyzer. Continue with
\Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals", \Troubleshooting Systems with
Controllers", or the \Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation" section in this chapter.
If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz, suspect the HP-IB function of the
analyzer. Refer to Chapter 6, \Digital Control Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals
Connect any other system peripherals (but not a controller) to the analyzer one at a time and
check their functionality. Any problems observed are in the peripherals, cables, or are address
problems (see above).
Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers
Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer's peripheral functions are normal.
Therefore, if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external controller, suspect
the controller. Check the following:
Compatibility, must be HP 9000 series 200/300. (See Chapter 1, \Service Equipment and
Analyzer Options.")
HP-IB interface hardware must be installed. (Refer to the manual, Installing and
Maintaining HP Basic/WS 6.2 , that comes with your HP Basic software.)
Select code. (Refer to the manual, Installing and Maintaining HP Basic/WS 6.2, that comes
with your HP Basic software.)
I/O and HP-IB binaries loaded. (Refer to the manual, Installing and Maintaining HP
Basic/WS 6.2 , that comes with your HP Basic software.)
HP-IB cables. (See \HP-IB Requirements" in the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User's
Guide .)
Programming syntax. (Refer to the HP 8753D Network Analyzer Programmer's Guide .)
If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed, go to
\Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-7
Step 4. Faulty Group Isolation
Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in this chapter and
you think the problem is in the analyzer. These are simple procedures to verify the four
functional groups in sequence, and determine which group is faulty.
The four functional groups are:
power supplies
digital control
source
receiver
Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12, \Theory of Operation."
The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented. If one of the
procedures fails, it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked. Go
to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group, to isolate the problem to the
defective assembly.
Figure 4-3 illustrates the troubleshooting organization.
Figure TO4 here.
Figure 4-3. Troubleshooting Organization
4-8 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply
Check the Rear Panel LEDs
Switch on the analyzer. Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the A15 preregulator at rear
of the analyzer. See Figure 4-4.
The upper (red) LED should be o.
The lower (green) LED should be on.
Figure REARLED4 here.
Figure 4-4. A15 Preregulator LEDs
Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs
Remove the analyzer's top cover. Switch on the power. Inspect the green LEDs along the top
edge of the A8 post-regulator assembly.
All green LEDs should be on.
The fan should be audible.
In case of diculty, refer to Chapter 5, \Power Supply Troubleshooting."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-9
Digital Control
Observe the Power Up Sequence
Switch the analyzer power o, then on. The following should take place within a few seconds:
1. On the front panel observe the following:
All six amber LEDs illuminate.
The amber LEDs go o after a few seconds, except the CH 1 LED.
See Figure 4-5.
2. The display should come up bright and focused.
3. Four red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should illuminate. They can be observed through a
small opening in the rear panel.
Figure FPPUS4 here.
Figure 4-5. Front Panel Power Up Sequence
Verify Internal Tests Passed
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE
display should indicate:
MENU TESTS INTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The
TEST
0 ALL INT
PASS
If your display shows the above message, go to step 2. Otherwise, continue with this
step.
If phase lock error messages are present, this test may stop without passing or failing. In
this case, continue with the next procedure to check the source.
4-10 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
If you have unexpected results, or if the analyzer indicates a specic test failure, that
internal test (and possibly others) have failed; the analyzer reports the rst failure
detected. Refer to Chapter 6, \Digital Control Troubleshooting."
If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test, press 45 to search for the
failed test. Then refer to Chapter 6, \Digital Control Troubleshooting." Likewise, if
the response to front panel or HP-IB commands is unexpected, troubleshoot the digital
control group.
2. Perform the Analog Bus test. Press RETURN 4195 4215 EXECUTE TEST .
If this test fails, refer to Chapter 6, \Digital Control Troubleshooting."
If this test passes, continue with the next procedure to check the source.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-11
Source
Phase Lock Error Messages
The error messages listed below are usually indicative of a source failure or improper
instrument conguration. (Ensure that the R channel input is receiving at least 035 dBm
power). Continue with this procedure.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
The rst IF was not detected during the pretune stage of phase lock.
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
The rst IF was detected at the pretune stage but phase lock could not be acquired
thereafter.
PHASE LOCK LOST
Phase-lock was acquired but then lost.
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at power-on, when
pretune values drift, or when phase lock problems are detected. A problem spoiled a
calibration attempt.
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
The analyzer is achieving phase lock but possibly on the wrong harmonic comb tooth.
SWEEP TIME TOO FAST
The fractional-N and the digital IF circuits have lost synchronization.
4-12 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Check Source Output Power
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-6.
Figure ESSPC4 here.
Figure 4-6. Equipment Setup for Source Power Check
2. Zero and calibrate the power meter. Press 4PRESET5 on the analyzer to initialize the
instrument.
3. On the analyzer, press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 43005 4k/m5 to output a CW 300 kHz signal. The
power meter should read approximately 4 dBm. (The frequency response of the power
splitter may account for up to 61 dB dierence.)
4. Press 4165 4M/5 to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz. The power output power should
remain approximately 4 dBm throughout the analyzers's frequency range. Repeat this step
at 1 and 3 GHz. (For Option 006 include an additional check at 6 GHz.)
If any incorrect power levels are measured, refer to Chapter 7, \Source Troubleshooting."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
No Oscilloscope or Power Meter? Try the ABUS
Monitor ABUS node 16.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4START5 43005 4k/m5 4STOP5 435 4G/n5 4SYSTEM5
2. 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 4165 4215.
3. 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE .
The display should resemble Figure 4-7.
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-13
Figure ABUS4 here.
Figure 4-7. ABUS Node 16: 1V/GHz
If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results, or if error messages are present,
refer to Chapter 7, \Source Troubleshooting."
4-14 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Receiver
Observe the R, A, and B Input Traces
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-8 below.
Figure REC4 here.
Figure 4-8. Equipment Setup
2. Press 4PRESET5 4MEAS5 R 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE 4MARKER FCTN5 MARKERREFERENCE .
3. Observe the measurement trace displayed by the R input. The trace should have about the
same atness as the trace in Figure 4-9.
NNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The R trace will be 20 dB lower than the A and B trace due to the attenuator
on the R input. The atness of the trace, however, should resemble that of the
A and B input traces.
4. Press 4MEAS5 A to check the A channel trace. The trace should have about the same
atness as the trace in Figure 4-9.
5. Move the A input cable to the B input and press B to check the B channel trace. The
trace should have about the same atness as the trace in Figure 4-9.
NNNNN
NNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-15
Figure TMT4 here.
Figure 4-9. Typical Measurement Trace
If the source is working, but the R, A, or B input traces appear to be in error, refer to
Chapter 8, \Receiver Troubleshooting."
The following symptoms may also indicate receiver failure.
Receiver Error Messages
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A; POWER REDUCED
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B; POWER REDUCED
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R; POWER REDUCED
4-16 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
The error messages above indicate that you have exceeded approximately +3 dBm at one
of the input ports. The RF output power is automatically switched o. The annotation P
appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been
activated. When this occurs, press 4MENU5 POWER and enter a lower power level. Press
POWER TRIP OFF to switch on the power again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Faulty Data
Any trace data that appears to be below the noise oor of the analyzer (0100 dBm) is
indicative of a receiver failure.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-17
Accessories
If the analyzer has passed all of the above checks but is still making incorrect measurements,
suspect the system accessories. Accessories such as RF or interconnect cables, calibration and
verication kit devices, adapters, and test sets can all induce system problems.
Recongure the system as it is normally used and reconrm the problem. Continue with
Chapter 9, \Accessories Troubleshooting."
Accessories Error Messages
POWER PROBE SHUT DOWN!
The biasing supplies to a front panel powered device (like a probe or millimeter module) are
shut down due to excessive current draw. Troubleshoot the device.
4-18 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Start Troubleshooting Here 4-19
(oversized art) /08753/90261/egs/sg614d.hpg
Figure 4-10. HP 8753D Option 011 Overall Block Diagram
4-20 Start Troubleshooting Here
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Contents
5.
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . .
Simplied Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start Here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15 . . .
Check the Green LEDs on A8 . . . . . . . . .
Measure the Post Regulator Voltages . . . . . .
If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily . . . .
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse
If the Red LED on A15 is ON . . . . . . . . . .
Check the A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . .
Check for a Faulty Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Operating Temperature . . . . . . .
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON . . . . .
Remove A8, Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection .
Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages . . . . . . . .
Remove the Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Briey Disable the Shutdown Circuitry . . . . .
Inspect the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 . . . . . . . . .
Fan Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Fan Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short A8TP3 to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-15
5-16
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-20
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Contents-1
Figures
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
Power Supply Group Simplied Block Diagram
Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . .
A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations . . .
Removing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Cable Locations . . . . . . .
A15W1 Plug Detail . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages .
Power Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-17
5-21
A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages . . . .
Output Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-5
5-8
5-9
5-14
Tables
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
5
Power Supply Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow the
procedures in the order given, unless:
an error message appears on the display, refer to \Error Messages" near the end of this
chapter.
the fan is not working, refer to \Fan Troubleshooting" in this chapter.
The power supply group assemblies consist of the following:
A8 post regulator
A15 preregulator
All assemblies, however, are related to the power supply group because power is supplied to
each assembly.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D network
analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
5-2 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Simplified Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows the power supply group in simplied block diagram form. Refer to the
detailed block diagram of the power supply (Figure 5-8) located at the end of this chapter to
see voltage lines and specic connector pin numbers.
Figure BLOCK5 here.
Figure 5-1. Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram
Start Here
Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15
Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer. Check the two power
supply diagnostic LEDs on the A15 preregulator casting by looking through the holes located
to the left of the line voltage selector switch. See Figure 5-2. During normal operation, the
bottom (green) LED is on and the top (red) LED is o. If these LEDs are normal, then A15
is 95% veried. Continue to \Check the Green LEDs on A8."
If the green LED is not on steadily, refer to \If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily"
in this procedure.
If the red LED is on or ashing, refer to \If the Red LED on A15 is ON" in this procedure.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-3
Figure LED5 here.
Figure 5-2. Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs
Check the Green LEDs on A8
Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the A8 post regulator; use the location
diagram under the top cover if necessary. Check to see if the green LEDs on the top edge of
A8 are all on. There are nine green LEDs (one is not visible without removing the PC board
stabilizer).
If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on, there is a 95% condence level that
the power supply is veried. To conrm the last 5% uncertainty of the power supply, refer
to \Measure the Post Regulator Voltages" (next).
If any LED on the A8 post regulator is o or ashing, refer to \If the Green LEDs on A8
are not All ON" in this procedure.
Measure the Post Regulator Voltages
Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter. Refer to Figure 5-3 for
test point locations and Table 5-1 for supply voltages and limits.
5-4 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Figure TPL5 here.
Figure 5-3. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations
Table 5-1. A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages
TP
Supply
Range
1
+65 V
+64.6 to +65.4
2
AGND
n/a
3
+5 VD
+4.9 to +5.3
4
SDIS
n/a
5
015 V
6
012.6VPP (probe power)
014.4 to 015.6
012.1 to 012.8
7
+15 V
+14.5 to +15.5
8
+5 VU
+5.05 to +5.35
9
05.2 V
05.0 to 05.4
10
+22 V
+21.3 to +22.7
11
+6 V
+5.8 to +6.2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-5
If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily
If the green LED is not on steadily, the line voltage is not sucient to power the analyzer.
Check the Line Voltage, Selector Switch, and Fuse
Check the main power line cord, line fuse, line selector switch setting, and actual line voltage
to see that they are all correct. Figure 5-4 shows how to remove the line fuse, using a small
at-bladed screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder. Figure 5-2 shows the location of the line
voltage selector switch. Use a small at-bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch
position.
If the A15 green LED is still not on steadily, replace A15.
Figure FUSE5 here.
Figure 5-4. Removing the Line Fuse
5-6 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
If the Red LED on A15 is ON
If the red LED is on or ashing, the power supply is shutting down. Use the following
procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem.
Check the A8 Post Regulator
1. Switch o the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the cable A15W1 from the A8 post regulator. See Figure 5-5.
3. Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15.
If the red LED goes out, the problem is probably the A8 post regulator. Continue to
\Verify the A15 Preregulator" to rst verify that the inputs to A8 are correct.
If the red LED is still on, the problem is probably the A15 preregulator, or one of the
assemblies obtaining power from it. Continue with \Check for a Faulty Assembly."
Figure PWRCABL5 here.
Figure 5-5. Power Supply Cable Locations
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-7
Verify the A15 Preregulator
Verify that the A15 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 post regulator.
Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1's plug. Refer to
Table 5-2 and Figure 5-6.
If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.
If the voltages are within tolerance, A15 is veried. Continue to \Check for a Faulty
Assembly."
Table 5-2. Output Voltages
Pin
A15W1P1 (Disconnected)
Voltages
A8J2 (Connected) Voltages
A15 Preregulator Mnemonic
1,2
+125 to +100
+68 to +72
+70 V
3,4
+22.4 to +33.6
+17.0 to +18.4
+18 V
5,6
022.4 to 033.6
017.0 to 018.4
018 V
7
N/C
N/C
N/C
8
+9.4 to +14
+7.4 to +8.0
+8 V
9,10
09.4 to 014
06.7 to 07.3
08 V
11
+32 to +48
+24.6 to +26.6
+25 V
12
N/C
N/C
N/C
NOTE: The +5VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all times, or the other voltages will not be
correct. It connects to motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4.
Figure PLUG5 here.
Figure 5-6. A15W1 Plug Detail
5-8 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Check for a Faulty Assembly
This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the A15 preregulator
via one of the following lines (also refer to Figure 5-1):
A15W1 connecting to the A8 post regulator
the +5VCPU line through the motherboard
the +5VDIG line through the motherboard
Do the following:
1. Switch o the analyzer.
2. Ensure that A15W1 is reconnected to A8. Refer to Figure 5-5.
3. Remove or disconnect the assemblies listed in Table 5-3 one at a time and in the order
shown. The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible. Table 5-3 also lists any
associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed. After each
assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on
A15.
Always switch o the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies.
Note
When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14, \Assembly
Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts," to identify specic cables and
assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.
If the red LED goes out, the particular assembly (or one receiving power from it) that
allows it to go out is faulty.
If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 5-3,
continue to \Check the Operating Temperature."
Table 5-3. Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Assembly
To Remove
1. A19 Graphics Processor
2. A14 Frac N Digital
3. A9 CPU
4. A16 Rear Panel Interface
5. A2 Front Panel Interface
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Other Assemblies that Receive
Removal or
Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly
Disconnect W14
A18 Display
Remove from Card Cage
None
Disconnect W36
A20 Disk Drive
Disconnect W27
None
Disconnect W17
A1 Front Panel Keyboard
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-9
Check the Operating Temperature
The temperature sensing circuitry inside the A15 preregulator may be shutting down the
supply. Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed 55
C (131 F), and that the analyzer fan is operating.
If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly, refer to \Fan Troubleshooting" at the end
of this procedure.
If there does not appear to be a temperature problem, it is likely that A15 is faulty.
Inspect the Motherboard
If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15, switch o the analyzer and
inspect the motherboard for solder bridges, and other noticeable defects. Use an ohmmeter
to check for shorts. The +5VD, +5VCPU, or +5VDSENSE lines may be bad. Refer to the
block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power
supply lines on the A17 motherboard.
5-10 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON
The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on.
Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post regulator is
protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down.
This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer.
Remove A8, Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection
1. Switch o the analyzer.
2. Remove A8 from its motherboard connector, but keep the A15W1 cable connected to A8.
3. Remove the display power cable W14. See Figure 5-5.
4. Short A8TP2 (AGND) (see Figure 5-3) to chassis ground with a clip lead.
5. Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
If any green LEDs other than +5VD are still o or ashing, continue to \Check the A8
Fuses and Voltages."
If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the +5VD LED, the A15 preregulator and A8
post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after
the motherboard connections at A8. Continue to \Remove the Assemblies."
Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages
Check the fuses along the top edge of A8. If any A8 fuse has burned out, replace it. If it
burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer, A8 or A15 is faulty. Determine which
assembly has failed as follows:
1. Remove the A15W1 cable at A8. See Figure 5-5.
2. Measure the voltages at A15W1P1 (see Figure 5-6) with a voltmeter having a small probe.
3. Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5-2.
If the voltages are within tolerance, replace A8.
If the voltages are not within tolerance, replace A15.
4. If the green LEDs are now on, the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working
properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections
at A8. Continue to \Remove the Assemblies."
Remove the Assemblies
1. Switch o the analyzer.
2. Install A8. Remove the jumper from A8TP2 (AGND) to chassis ground.
3. Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below. See Figure 5-5. Always switch o
the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly.
A10 digital IF
A11 phase lock
A12 reference
A13 fractional-N analog
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-11
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
A14 fractional-N digital
A19 graphics processor (disconnect W14, A18W1, and W20)
Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8.
If any of the green LEDs are o or ashing, it is not likely that any of the assemblies
listed above is causing the problem. Continue to \Briey Disable the Shutdown
Circuitry."
If all green LEDs are now on, one or more of the above assemblies may be faulty.
Continue to next step.
Switch o the analyzer.
Reconnect W14 and W20 to A19.
Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs.
If the LEDs are o or blinking, replace the A19 assembly.
If the LEDs are still on, continue to next step.
Switch o the analyzer.
Reconnect A18W1 to the A19 assembly.
Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs.
If the LEDs are o, replace the A18 display.
If the LEDs are still on, continue with the next step.
Switch o the analyzer.
Reinstall each assembly one at a time. Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is
installed. The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go o or ash could be faulty.
Note
It is possible, however, that this condition is caused by the A8 post regulator
not supplying enough current. To check this, reinstall the assemblies in a
dierent order to change the loading. If the same assembly appears to be
faulty, replace that assembly. If a dierent assembly appears faulty, A8 is most
likely faulty (unless both of the other assemblies are faulty).
Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry
In this step, you shutdown the protective circuitry is disabled for a short time, and the
supplies are forced on (including shorted supplies) with a 100% duty cycle.
Caution
Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if A8TP4 (SDIS) is
shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds while supplies are
shorted.
1. Connect A8TP4 (SDIS) to chassis ground with a jumper wire.
2. Switch on the analyzer and note the signal mnemonics and test points of any LEDs that
are o. Immediately remove the jumper wire .
3. Refer to the block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the end of this chapter and do the following:
Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8 test point that
showed a fault in the previous step.
5-12 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Cross reference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out when
A8TP4 (SDIS) was connected to chassis ground.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-13
Make a list of these assemblies.
Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been veried earlier in
this section.
A10 digital IF
A11 phase lock
A12 reference
A13 fractional-N analog
A14 fractional-N digital
A18 display
A19 graphics processor
4. Switch o the analyzer.
5. Of those assemblies that are left on the list, remove or disconnect them from the analyzer
one at a time. Table 5-4 shows the best order in which to remove them, sorting them from
most to least accessible. Table 5-4 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied by
the assembly that is being removed. After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch
on the analyzer and observe the LEDs.
Note
Always switch o the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies.
When extensive disassembly is required, refer to Chapter 14, \Assembly
Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts," to identify specic cables and
assemblies that are not shown in this chapter.
If all the LEDs light, the assembly (or one receiving power from it) that allows them to light
is faulty.
If the LEDs are still not on steadily, continue to \Inspect the Motherboard."
Table 5-4. Recommended Order for Removal/Disconnection
Assembly
To Remove
1. A3 Source
2. A7 Pulse Generator
3. A4 R Sampler
4. A5 A Sampler
5. A6 B Sampler
6. A9 CPU
7. A2 Front Panel Interface
8. A16 Rear Panel Interface
Other Assemblies that Receive
Removal or
Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly
Remove from Card Cage
None
Remove from Card Cage
None
Remove from Card Cage
None
Remove from Card Cage
None
Remove from Card Cage
None
Disconnect W35 and W36 A20 Disk Drive
Disconnect W17
A1 Front Panel Keyboard
Disconnect W27
None
5-14 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Inspect the Motherboard
Inspect the A17 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces. In particular, inspect the
traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 (SDIS) was grounded earlier.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-15
Error Messages
Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group. They are
shown here.
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to one of the
following conditions: overcurrent, overvoltage, or undervoltage. Refer to \If the Red LED
on A15 is ON" earlier in this procedure.
POWER SUPPLY HOT
The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an overtemperature
condition. The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down.
Check the temperature of the operating environment; it should not be greater than +55 C
(131 F). The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm (6 in) spacing
behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation.
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
The front panel RF probe biasing supplies are shut down due to excessive current draw.
These supplies are +15VPP and 012.6VPP, both supplied by the A8 post regulator.
+15VPP is derived from the +15 V supply. 012.6VPP is derived from the 012.6 V supply.
5-16 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Refer to Figure 5-7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the front panel RF
probe connectors.
Figure PROBE5 here.
Figure 5-7. Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages
1. If the correct voltages are present, troubleshoot the probe.
2. If the voltages are not present, check the +15 V and 012.6 V green LEDs on A8.
If the LEDs are on, there is an open between the A8 assembly and the front panel probe
power connectors. Put A8 onto an extender board and measure the voltages at the
following pins:
A8P2 pins 6 and 36
A8P2 pins 4 and 34
012.6 V
+15 V
If the LEDs are o, continue with \Check the Fuses and Isolate A8."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-17
Check the Fuses and Isolate A8
Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points. If these fuses
keep burning out, a short exists. Try isolating A8 by removing it from the motherboard
connector, but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J2. Connect a jumper wire from
A8TP2 to chassis ground.
If either the +15 V or 012.6 V fuse blows, or the associated green LEDs do not light,
replace A8.
If the +15 V and 012.6 V green LEDs light, troubleshoot for a short between the
motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 (012.6 V) and the front panel probe
power connectors. Also check between motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 4 and 34
(+15 V) and the front panel probe power connectors.
5-18 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Fan Troubleshooting
Fan Speeds
The fan speed varies depending upon temperature. It is normal for the fan to be at high
speed when the analyzer is just switched on, and then change to low speed when the analyzer
is cooled.
Check the Fan Voltages
If the fan is dead, refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram (Figure 5-8) at the end of
this chapter. The fan is driven by the +18 V and 018 V supplies coming from the A15
preregulator. Neither of these supplies is fused.
The 018 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block, and remains constant at
approximately 014 V. It connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P1 connector.
The +18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan, depending on airow
and temperature information. Its voltage ranges from approximately 01.0 V to +14.7 V, and
connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P1 connector.
Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the
PC board connector, A8P1.
Short A8TP3 to Ground
If there is no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32, switch o the analyzer. Remove A8 from its
motherboard connector (or extender board) but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8 (see
Figure 5-5). Connect a jumper wire between A8TP3 and chassis ground. Switch on the
analyzer.
If all the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 light (except +5 VD), replace the fan.
If other green LEDs on A8 do not light, refer to \If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON"
earlier in this procedure.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-19
Intermittent Problems
PRESET states that appear spontaneously (without pressing 4PRESET5) typically signal a
power supply or A9 CPU problem. Since the A9 CPU assembly is the easiest to substitute,
do so. If the problem ceases, replace the A9. If the problem continues, replace the A15
preregulator assembly.
5-20 Power Supply Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
(oversized art) /08753/90261/egs/sg629d.hpg
Figure 5-8. Power Supply Block Diagram
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:12
Power Supply Troubleshooting 5-21
Contents
7.
Source Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before You Start Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44) . . . . . . .
2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47) . . . . .
3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Phase Lock Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check . . . . . . . . . . .
A4 Sampler/Mixer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . .
YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . .
YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . .
A12 Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oscilloscope Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 kHz Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLREF Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF Signal At A11TP1 Pin 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Band REF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Band REF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FN LO at A12 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 MHz Reference Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2ND LO Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 Degree Phase Oset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band . .
In-Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band . . . . . . . . . .
A12 Digital Control Signals Check . . . . . . . . . . . .
L ENREF Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L HB and L LB Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . .
A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . .
A14 VCO Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signals Check. . . . . . . . . .
H MB Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A7 Pulse Generator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer . . . . .
Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . .
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope . . . . . . . .
A11 Phase Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-6
7-7
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-15
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-21
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-26
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-32
Contents-1
Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination . . . . .
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus
Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-32
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-34
7-34
Index
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figures
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.
7-5.
7-6.
7-7.
7-8.
7-9.
7-10.
7-11.
7-12.
7-13.
7-14.
7-15.
7-16.
7-17.
7-18.
7-19.
7-20.
7-21.
7-22.
7-23.
7-24.
7-25.
7-26.
7-27.
Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup . . . . . . . .
Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram . . . . . . . .
Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode
1V/GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL O. . . . . . . . . .
YO0 and YO+ Coil Drive Voltage Dierences with SOURCE PLL OFF . .
Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Band REF Signal (16 MHz CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF Signal at A11TP9 (5 MHz CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical FN LO Waveform at A12J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 Degree Phase Oset of High Band 2nd LO Signals (16 MHz CW) . . .
In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals (14 MHz CW) . . . . . . . . . . .
L ENREF Line at A12P2-16 (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complementary L HB and L LB Signals (Preset) . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO OUT Waveform at A14J2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A14 Generated Digital Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H MB Signal at A14P1-5 (Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep) . . . . .
Pulse Generator Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE/SRC TUNE Mode . . . . . .
FM Coil { Plot with 3 Point Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-8
7-8
7-10
7-11
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-24
7-25
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-33
Tables
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.
7-5.
7-6.
7-7.
7-8.
Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode . . .
Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies
A12 Reference Frequencies . . . . . . . .
A12-Related Digital Control Signals . . . .
VCO Range Check Frequencies . . . . . .
A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signal Locations
1st IF Waveform Settings . . . . . . . .
A11 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-7
7-12
7-13
7-21
7-22
7-26
7-30
7-32
Contents-3
7
Source Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." This
chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the following problems:
Incorrect power levels: Perform the \Power" troubleshooting checks.
Phase lock error: Perform the \Phase Lock Error" troubleshooting checks.
The source group assemblies consist of the following:
A3 source
A4 sampler/mixer
A7 pulse generator
A11 phase lock
A12 reference
A13 fractional-N (analog)
A14 fractional-N (digital)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network
Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
Before You Start Troubleshooting
Make sure all of the assemblies are rmly seated. Also make sure that input R has a signal of
at least 035 dBm (about 0.01 Vp-p into 50 ohms) at all times to maintain phase lock.
7-2 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Power
If the analyzer output power levels are incorrect but no phase lock error is present, perform
the following checks in the order given:
1. Source Default Correction Constants (Test 44)
To run this test, press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4445 4215 EXECUTE TEST .
When complete, DONE should appear on the analyzer display. Use a power meter to verify
that source power can be controlled and that the power level is approximately correct. If the
source passes these checks, proceed with step 2. However, if FAIL appears on the analyzer
display, or if the analyzer fails the checks, replace the source.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. RF Output Power Correction Constants (Test 47)
Follow the instructions for this procedure given in Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants." The procedure is complete when \DONE" appears on the analyzer display. Use a
power meter to verify that power levels are now correct. If power levels are not correct, or if
the analyzer fails the routine, proceed with step 3.
3. Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)
Follow the instructions for this procedure given in Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants." The procedure is complete when \DONE" appears on the analyzer display. Next,
repeat step 2. If the analyzer fails the routine in step 2, replace the source.
If the analyzer fails the routine in step 3, replace the source.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-3
Phase Lock Error
Figure PLE7 here.
Figure 7-1. Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup
Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock diagnostic tools.
The assembly location diagram is on the underside of the instrument top cover. The diagram
shows major assembly locations and RF cable connections. The phase lock diagnostic tools
are explained in the \Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix" and should be used to
troubleshoot phase lock problems. The equipment setup shown in Figure 7-1 can be used
throughout this chapter.
Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check
Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune correction constants.
To check this possibility, perform the pretune correction constants routine.
The four phase lock error messages, listed below, are described in the \Source Group
Troubleshooting Appendix" at the end of this chapter.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
PHASE LOCK LOST
1. Connect the power splitter, RF cable and attenuator to inputs A and R as shown in
Figure 7-1.
2. Make sure the A9 CC Jumper is in the ALTER position.
a. Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
b. Set the analyzer on its side.
c. Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T-15 TORX
screwdriver.
7-4 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
d.
e.
f.
g.
Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover's back edge.
Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
Move the jumper to the ALT position as shown in Figure 7-2.
Replace the bottom cover, corner bumpers, and power cord.
Figure JUMP7 here.
Figure 7-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU
3. Switch on the analyzer and press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4465 4215
EXECUTE TEST to generate new analog bus correction constants. Then press 4PRESET5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4455 4215 EXECUTE TEST to generate default pretune
correction constants.
Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4485 4215 EXECUTE TEST YES to generate
new pretune correction constants.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
Always press 4PRESET5 before and after performing an adjustment test.
4. Press 4PRESET5 and observe the analyzer display:
No error message: restore the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position. Then refer to
\Post-Repair Procedures" in Chapter 14 to verify operation.
Error message visible: continue with \A4 Sampler/Mixer Check."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-5
A4 Sampler/Mixer Check
The A4, A5, and A6 (R, A and B) sampler/mixers are identical. Any sampler can be used to
phase lock the source. To eliminate the possibility of a bad R sampler, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the power splitter, RF cable and attenuator to inputs A (or B) and R as shown in
Figure 7-1.
2. Remove the W8 cable (A11J1 to A4) from the R-channel sampler (A4) and connect it to
either the A-channel sampler (A5) or the B-channel sampler (A6), depending on which one
you selected in step 1. Refer to Figure 7-3.
Figure SAMMIX7 here.
Figure 7-3. Sampler/Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram
3. If you connected W8 to:
A5, press 4MEAS5 A/R
A6, press 4MEAS5 B/R
4. Ignore the displayed trace, but check for phase lock error messages. If the phase lock
problem persists, the R-channel sampler is not the problem.
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
7-6 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check
This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly. It opens the
phase-locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output frequency with the
A11 pretune DAC.
Note
If the analyzer failed internal test 48, default pretune correction constants
were stored which may result in a constant oset of several MHz. Regardless,
continue with this procedure.
Note
Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz.
1. Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7-1. (Set the oscilloscope
input impedance to 50 ohms.)
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU SRC TUNE ON
SRC TUNE FREQ to activate the source tune (SRC TUNE) service mode.
3. Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency to 300 kHz, 30
MHz, and 40 MHz. Verify the signal frequency on the oscilloscope.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
In SRC TUNE mode, the source output frequency changes in 1 to 2 MHz
increments and should be 1 to 6 MHz above the indicated output frequency.
4. Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode
Setting
Observed Frequency
300 kHz
1.3 to 6.3 MHz
30 MHz
31 to 36 MHz
40 MHz
41 to 46 MHz
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-7
5. The signal observed on an oscilloscope should be as solid as the signal in Figure 7-4.
Figure WAVE7 here.
Figure 7-4. Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode
6. The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery as in Figure 7-5 (b), not
solid as in Figure 7-5 (a). This is because in SRC TUNE mode the output is not phase
locked.
Figure PLCOMP7 here.
Figure 7-5. Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode
7. Press 4MENU5 POWER to vary the power and check for corresponding level changes on
the test instrument. (A power change of 20 dB will change the voltage observed on the
oscilloscope by a factor of ten.)
8. Note the results of the frequency and power changes:
If the frequency and power output changes are correct, skip ahead to \A12 Reference
Check" located in this chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-8 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
If the frequency changes are not correct, continue with \YO Coilk Drive Check with
Analog Bus."
If the power output changes are not correct, check analog bus node 3.
a. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS
ANALOG IN Aux Input 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 435 4215.
b. Press 4MARKER5 425 4G/n5. The marker should read approximately 434 mU.
c. Press 4MARKER5 445 4G/n5. The marker should read approximately 646 mU.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Source Troubleshooting 7-9
YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus
Note
If the analog bus is not functional, perform the \YO Drive Coil Check with
Oscilloscope" test.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES
SOURCE PLL OFF 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER: ANALOG BUS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Then press 4165 4215 4FORMAT5 MORE REAL 4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE . This keystroke sequence
lets you check the pretune DAC and the A11 output to the YO coil drive by monitoring
the 1 V/GHz signal at analog bus node 16.
3. Compare the waveform to Figure 7-6. If the waveform is incorrect, the A11 phase lock
assembly is faulty.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure ABN7 here.
Figure 7-6. 1V/GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off.
7-10 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope
Note
Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage points. The
extender board is included with the HP 8753 Tool Kit. See Chapter 13,
\Replaceable Parts," for part numbers and ordering information.
1. Connect oscilloscope probes to A11P1-1 and A11P1-2. The YO coil drive signal is actually
two signals whose voltage dierence drives the coil.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF to operate the
analyzer in a swept open loop mode.
3. Monitor the two YO coil drive lines. In source tune mode the voltage dierence should
vary from approximately 3.5 to 5.0 volts as shown in Figure 7-7.
If the voltages are not correct, replace the faulty A11 assembly.
If the output signals from the A11 assembly are correct, replace the faulty A3 source
assembly.
If neither the A11, nor the A3 assembly is faulty, continue with the next check.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure VDIFF7 here.
Figure 7-7. YO0 and YO+ Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL OFF
A12 Reference Check
The signals are evaluated with pass/fail checks. The most ecient way to check the A12
frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to Table 7-2.
Alternatively, you can use an oscilloscope, while referring to Table 7-3 and Figure 7-8 through
Figure 7-14. If any of the observed signals dier from the gures, there is a 90% probability
that the A12 assembly is faulty. Either consider the A12 assembly defective or perform the
\A12 Digital Control Signals Check."
Both of these procedures are described below.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-11
Analog Bus Method
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS
ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS to switch on the analog bus and its counter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4215 4215 to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal.
3. Press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 45005 4k/m5. Verify that the counter reading (displayed on the
analyzer next to cnt:) matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for the CW frequency.
(Refer to Table 7-2.)
4. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
Press 425 4M/5.
Press 4505 4M/5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 7-2. Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies
CW Frequency
Analog Bus Node 21
100 kHz
Analog Bus Node 24
2nd LO
Analog Bus Node 25
PLREF
500 kHz
0.100 MHz
0.504 MHz
0.500 MHz
2 MHz
0.100 MHz
2.007 MHz
2.000 MHz
50 MHz
0.100 MHz
0.996 MHz
1.000 MHz
NOTE: The counter should indicate the frequencies listed in this table to within 60.1%.
gate time and signal strength.
Accuracy may vary with
5. Press 4245 4215 to count the frequency of the 2nd LO signal.
6. Press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 45005 4k/m5. Verify that the counter reading matches the
corresponding 2nd LO value for the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
7. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
Press 425 4M/5.
Press 4505 4M/5.
8. Press 4255 4215 to count the frequency of the PLREF signal.
9. Press 4MENU5 CW FREQ 45005 4k/m5. Verify that the counter reading matches the
corresponding PLREF value for the CW frequency. (Refer to Table 7-2.)
10. Verify the remaining CW frequencies, comparing the counter reading with the value in
Table 7-2:
Press 425 4M/5.
Press 4505 4M/5.
11. Check the results.
If all the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7-2, skip ahead
to\A13/A14 Fractional-N Check."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-12 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings only, go to \FN
LO at A12 Check."
If all the counter readings are incorrect at all three CW frequencies, the counter may be
faulty. Perform the \Oscilloscope Method" check of the signals described below. (If the
signals are good, either the A10 or A14 assemblies could be faulty.)
Oscilloscope Method
You need not use the oscilloscope method unless the analog bus is non-functional or any of the
signals fail the specications listed in Table 7-2.
If the analog bus is non-functional or the previous check has revealed questionable signals,
observe the signal(s) with an oscilloscope. Table 7-3 identies a convenient test point and a
plot for the ve signals listed.
Table 7-3. A12 Reference Frequencies
Mnemonic
Signal
Description
Location
See
Figure
Analyzer
Setting
FN100kHzREF
100 kHz Reference
A13TP5
Figure 7-8
any
REF
Phase Lock Reference
A11TP1 Pin 9
Figure 7-9
16 MHz CW
REF
Phase Lock Reference
A11TP1 Pin 9
Figure 7-10
5 MHz CW
FN LO*
Fractional-N LO
A14J2
Figure 7-11
10 MHz CW
4 MHz REF
4 MHz Reference
A12TP9
Figure 7-12
any
2ND LO+/0
Second LO
A12P1-2,4
Figure 7-13
16 MHz CW
2ND LO+/0
Second LO
A12P1-2,4
Figure 7-14
14 MHz CW
* Not an A12 signal, but required for A12 lowband operation.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-13
100 kHz Pulses
The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1.5 V in amplitude. You may have to
increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses. (See Figure 7-8.)
Figure SHARP7 here.
Figure 7-8. Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 (any frequency)
7-14 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
PLREF Waveforms
REF Signal At A11TP1 Pin 9. REF is the buered PLREF+ signal. The 1st IF is phase locked
to this signal. Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the frequencies noted in Figure 7-9
and Figure 7-10.
High Band REF Signal. In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square wave as
indicated by Figure 7-9.
Figure HBSIG7 here.
Figure 7-9. High Band REF Signal (16 MHz CW)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-15
Low Band REF Signal. In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF output signal.
Figure 7-10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal.
Figure REFSIG7 here.
Figure 7-10. REF Signal at A11TP9 (5 MHz CW)
If REF looks good, skip ahead to \4 MHz Reference Signal."
If REF is bad in low band, continue with \FN LO at A12 Check."
7-16 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
FN LO at A12 Check
1. Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN LO from A14 at the cable end of A14J2. Press
4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to switch on the
fractional-N service mode.
2. Use the front panel knob to vary the frequency from 30 to 60 MHz. The signal should
appear similar to Figure 7-11. The display will indicate 10 to 60.8 MHz.
a. If the FN LO signal is good, the A12 assembly is faulty.
b. If the FN LO signal is not good, skip ahead to \A13/A14 Fractional-N Check."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure LOWAVE7 here.
Figure 7-11. Typical FN LO Waveform at A12J1
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-17
4 MHz Reference Signal
This reference signal is used to control the receiver. If faulty, this signal can cause apparent
source problems because the CPU uses receiver data to control the source. At A12TP9 it
should appear similar to Figure 7-12.
Figure REFS7 here.
Figure 7-12. 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 (Preset)
7-18 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
2ND LO Waveforms
The 2nd LO signals appear dierent in phase and shape at dierent frequencies. Refer to
Table 7-3 for convenient test points.
90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band. In high band, the 2nd LO is 996
kHz. As indicated by Figure 7-13, the 2nd LO actually consists of two signals 90 degrees out
of phase.
Figure PHASEO7 here.
Figure 7-13. 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals (16 MHz CW)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-19
In-Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band. The 2nd LO signals in low band, as shown in
Figure 7-14, are not phase shifted. In low band these signals track the RF output with a 4
kHz oset.
Figure INPHAS7 here.
Figure 7-14. In-Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals (14 MHz CW)
If any of the signals of Table 7-2 are incorrect, the probability is 90% that the A12 assembly is
faulty. Either consider the A12 assembly faulty or perform the \A12 Digital Control Signals
Check" described below.
7-20 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
A12 Digital Control Signals Check
Several digital control signals must be functional for the A12 assembly to operate properly.
Check the control lines listed in Table 7-4 with the oscilloscope in the high input impedance
setting.
Table 7-4. A12-Related Digital Control Signals
Mnemonic
Signal
Description
Location
See
Figure
Analyzer
Setting
L ENREF
L=Reference Enable
A12P2-16
Figure 7-15
Preset
L HB
L=High Band
A12P2-32
Figure 7-16
Preset
L LB
L=Low Band
A12P1-23
Figure 7-16
Preset
L ENREF Line. This is a TTL signal. To observe it, trigger on the negative edge. In preset
state, the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7-15.
Figure ENREF7 here.
Figure 7-15. L ENREF Line at A12P2-16 (Preset)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-21
L HB and L LB Lines. These complementary signals toggle when the instrument switches from
low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7-16.
Figure COMPSIG7 here.
Figure 7-16. Complementary L HB and L LB Signals (Preset)
If all of the digital signals appeared good, the A12 assembly is faulty.
A13/A14 Fractional-N Check
Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the A14 VCO's ability to sweep from 30 MHz
to 60 MHz. The faster analog bus method should suce unless problems are detected.
Fractional-N Check with Analog Bus
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS
ANALOG IN Aux Input FRAC N to switch on the analog bus and the fractional-N
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
counter.
2. Then press 4MENU5 4CW FREQ5 to set the analyzer to CW mode.
3. Set the instrument as indicated in Table 7-5 and see whether the VCO generates the
frequencies listed.
Table 7-5. VCO Range Check Frequencies
Instrument Setting
31 MHz
60.999999 MHz
Counter Reading
60.030 MHz
60 60.060 MHz
30
4. Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated.
If the readings are within the limits specied, the probability is greater than 90% that
the fractional-N assemblies are functional. Either skip ahead to the \A7 Pulse Generator
Check," or perform the more conclusive \A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope"
described below.
7-22 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
If the readings fail the specied limits, perform the \A14 VCO Exercise."
A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope
1. Remove the W9 HI OUT cable (A14J1 to A7) from the A7 assembly and connect it to an
oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance. Switch on the analyzer.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to activate the
FRACN TUNE service mode. See Chapter 10, \Service Key Menus and Error Messages,"
for more information on the FRACN TUNE mode.
3. Vary the fractional-N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check the signal with
the oscilloscope. The waveform should resemble Figure 7-17, Figure 7-18, and Figure 7-19.
If the fractional-N output signals are correct, continue source troubleshooting by skipping
ahead to \A7 Pulse Generator Check."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure HO107 here.
Figure 7-17. 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-23
Figure HO257 here.
Figure 7-18. 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
Figure HO607 here.
Figure 7-19. 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1
A14 VCO Exercise
The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is +10 to 05 volts. When the analyzer is in
operation, this voltage is supplied by the A13 assembly. This procedure substitutes a power
supply for the A13 assembly to check the frequency range of the A14 VCO.
1. Switch o the analyzer and remove the A13 assembly.
2. Put the A14 assembly on an extender board and switch on the instrument.
3. Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency, either by:
Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FRACN node, or
7-24 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 (labeled LO OUT) and looking for waveforms
similar to Figure 7-20.
Figure LOWAV27 here.
Figure 7-20. LO OUT Waveform at A14J2
4. Vary the voltage at A14TP14 from +10 to 05 volts either by:
Connecting an appropriate external power supply to A14TP14, or
First jumping the +15 V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14 and then
jumping the 05.2 V supply from A8TP10 to A14TP14.
5. Conrm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less to 60 MHz or
more.
6. If this procedure produces unexpected results, the A14 assembly is faulty.
7. If this procedure produces the expected results, continue with the \A14 Divide-by-N
Circuit Check."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-25
A14 Divide-by-N Circuit Check
Note
The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14 assembly
on an extender board.
1. Ground A14TP14 and conrm (as in the A14 VCO Exercise) that the VCO oscillates at
approximately 50 to 55 MHz.
2. Put the analyzer in CW mode (to avoid relock transitions) and activate the FRACN TUNE
service mode.
3. Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output.
4. With the FRACN TUNE service feature, vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 60.8 MHz.
5. The period of the observed signal should vary from 5.5 s to 11 s.
If this procedure produces unexpected results, the A14 assembly is faulty.
If this procedure produces the expected results, perform the \A14-to-A13 Digital Control
Signals Check."
6. Remember to replace the A13 assembly.
A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signals Check.
The A14 assembly generates a TTL cycle start (CST) signal every 10 microseconds. If the
VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at A14TP3, the A14 assembly is
non-functional.
Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the signals in
Table 7-6. Since these TTL signals are generated by A14 to control A13, check them at A13
rst. Place A13 on the large extender board. The signals should look similar to Figure 7-21.
If these signals are good, the A13 assembly is defective.
Table 7-6. A14-to-A13 Digital Control Signal Locations
Mnemonic
A13 Location
A14 Location
CST
none
TP3
L FNHOLD
P2-2
P2-2
FNBIAS
P2-5
P2-5
API1
P2-32
P2-32
API2
P2-3
P2-3
API3
P2-34
P2-34
API4
P2-4
P2-4
API5
P2-35
P2-35
NLATCH
P1-28
P1-58
7-26 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure DCS7 here.
Figure 7-21. A14 Generated Digital Control Signals
H MB Line. This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep. The upper trace of
Figure 7-22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset condition. The lower trace
shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep with inactivity during retrace only.
Figure MBS7 here.
Figure 7-22. H MB Signal at A14P1-5 (Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-27
A7 Pulse Generator Check
The pulse generator aects phase lock in high band only. It can be checked with either a
spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope.
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer
1. Remove the A7-to-A6 SMB cable (W7) from the A7 pulse generator assembly. Set the
analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A7
output connector and observe the signal. The A7 comb should resemble the spectral
display in Figure 7-23.
Figure PGO7 here.
Figure 7-23. Pulse Generator Output
2. If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range, look more closely
at the comb tooth there. Adjust the spectrum analyzer span and bandwidth as required.
Even at 3 GHz, the comb should look as clean as Figure 7-24. For Option 006 instruments
at 6 GHz the comb tooth level should be approximately 046 dBm.
7-28 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure COMB7 here.
Figure 7-24. High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz
3. If the signal at the A7 output is good, check the A7-to-A4 cable.
4. If the signal is not as clean as Figure 7-24, observe the HI OUT input signal to the A7
assembly.
On the network analyzer, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES
PLL AUTO OFF . Otherwise do not readjust the instrument. Remove the A14-to-A7 SMB
cable (W9) from the A7 pulse generator assembly.(CW 16 MHz)
Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span of 30 MHz.
Connect it to the A14-to-A7 cable still attached to the A14 assembly. Narrow the span
and bandwidth to observe the signal closely.
5. If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7-25, the A7 assembly is faulty.
Otherwise, check the A14-to-A7 cable or recheck the A13/A14 fractional-N as described
ahead.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Rechecking the A13/A14 Fractional-N
Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the fractional-N loop. To
troubleshoot this unusual failure mode, do the following:
1. Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode.
2. Use a spectrum analyzer, to examine the HI OUT signal from the A14 assembly. The
signal should appear as clean as Figure 7-25. The comb shape may vary from pulse
generator to pulse generator.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-29
Figure STABHO7 here.
Figure 7-25. Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode
A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope
Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available.
1. Remove the A4-to-A11 SMB cable from the A4 (R) sampler/mixer output. Connect the
oscilloscope to the A4 output (1st IF).
2. Activate the FRACN TUNE service mode and tune the fractional-N to 50 MHz. Press
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON 4505 4M/5.
3. Activate the SRC TUNE service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to 50 MHz.
Press SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ 4505 4M/5.
4. Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7-7 and observe the 1st IF
waveforms. They should appear similar to Figure 7-26.
If the signals observed are proper, continue with \A11 Phase Lock Check."
If the signals observed are questionable, use a spectrum analyzer to perform the
preceding \A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 7-7. 1st IF Waveform Settings
SRC TUNE
FRACN
Harmonic
1st IF
50 MHz
50 MHz
1
1 to 6 MHz
250 MHz
50 MHz
5
1 to 6 MHz
2550 MHz
50 MHz
51
1 to 6 MHz
7-30 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure IFWAVE7 here.
Figure 7-26. Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE/SRC TUNE Mode
A11 Phase Lock Check
At this point, the A11 phase lock assembly appears to be faulty (its inputs should have been
veried already). Nevertheless, you may elect to use the phase lock diagnostic routines or
check the relevant signals at the assembly itself for conrmation.
Note
If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase lock problems,
replace the A11 phase lock assembly.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-31
Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG
Refer to \Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools" in \Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix" at
the end of this chapter for an explanation of the error messages and the diagnostic routines.
Follow the steps there to determine in which state the phase lock is lost.
If NO IF FOUND is displayed, conrm that the analog bus is functional and perform the
\Source Pretune Correction Constants (Test 48)" as outlined in Chapter 3, \Adjustments
and Correction Constants."
If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state, the A11 assembly is faulty.
If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state, troubleshoot source phase lock loop components
other than the A11 assembly.
Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination
To conrm that the A11 assembly is receiving the signals required for its proper operation,
perform the following steps:
1. Place the A11 assembly on the large extender board.
2. Switch on the analyzer and press 4PRESET5.
3. Check for the signals listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8. A11 Input Signals
Mnemonic
FM COIL
0
I/O
O
Access
A11P1-3,33
See
Figure
Figure 7-27
Notes
Aids YO COIL in setting YIG. Press 4PRESET5 4MENU5
?????????????????????????????
2
NUMBER OF POINTS 435 4 15 to observe this signal.
REF
I
A11TP9
Figure 7-9,
Figure 7-10
Observe both low band and high band CW frequencies.
YO COIL +
O
A11P1-2,32
Figure 7-7
Use SOURCE PLL OFF .
0
O
A11P1-1,31
Figure 7-7
I
A11 PL IF IN
Figure 7-26
YO COIL
1ST IF
7-32 Source Troubleshooting
??????????????????????????
Check for 1 MHz with tee a A11 jack (not at cable end) in high band.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure FMCOIL7 here.
Figure 7-27. FM Coil { Plot with 3 Point Sweep
4. If any of the input signals are not proper, refer to the overall block diagram in Chapter 4,
\Start Troubleshooting Here," as an aid to trouble shooting the problem to its source.
5. If any of the output signals are not proper, the A11 assembly is faulty.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-33
Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix
Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus
The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks. However, it too is subject to failure
and thus should be tested prior to use. You should have done this in Chapter 4, \Start
Troubleshooting Here."
To use the analog bus to check any one of the nodes, press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU
ANALOG BUS IN . Then press 4MEAS5 S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input and enter the
analog bus node number followed by 4215. Refer to \Analog Bus" in Chapter 10, \Service Key
Menus and Error Messages," for additional information.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools
error messages
diagnostic routines
Phase Lock Error Messages
All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune: a source
problem. Perform the \A4 Sampler/Mixer Check."
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after pretune: a
source problem. Perform the \A4 Sampler/Mixer Check," earlier in this chapter.
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of pretune values was not successful: a
source or receiver failure. Perform the \Source Pretune Correction Constants" routine as
outlined in Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction Constants." If the analyzer fails that
routine, perform the
\A4 Sampler/Mixer Check."
PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band sweep
ended: a source problem. Refer to \Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines" next to access the
phase lock loop diagnostic service routine. Then troubleshoot the problem by following the
procedures in this chapter.
Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines
Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the phase lock
problem occurs.
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF to switch o the
automatic phase-locked loop. Normally, when the phase-locked loop detects lock problems,
it automatically aborts the sweep and attempts to recalibrate the pretune cycle. Switching
o PLL AUTO defeats this routine.
2. Press PLL DIAG ON to switch on the phase-locked loop diagnostic service mode. In this
mode, the phase lock cycle and subsweep number are displayed on the analyzer display.
(See \Service Modes Menu" in Chapter 10, \Service Key Menus and Error Messages," for
more information.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-34 Source Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
3. Press PLL PAUSE to pause the phase lock sequence and determine where the source is
trying to tune when lock is lost.
Refer to \Source Theory Overview" in Chapter 12, \Theory of Operation," for additional
information regarding band related problems. Then use the procedures in this chapter to
check source functions at specic frequencies.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Source Troubleshooting 7-35
Contents
8.
Receiver Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Failure Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the R, A, and B inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad . . . . . . . .
Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check 2nd LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination . . . .
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good . . .
Check the 4 kHz Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants O
Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . .
Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Contents-1
Figures
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Good Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 MHz REF Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger .
Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger
2nd IF (4 kHz) Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and O . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-1. Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Signal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3. 2nd LO Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
8-8
8-10
Tables
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
8
Receiver Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow the
procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
The receiver group assemblies consist of the following:
A4/5/6 sampler/mixer assemblies
A10 digital IF assembly
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Receiver Troubleshooting 8-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network
Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
Receiver Failure Error Messages
The error messages which indicate receiver group problems may be caused by the instrument
itself or by external devices or connections. Remember that RF OUT must be connected to
input R to maintain phase lock (unless internal cables are moved). The following three error
messages share the same description.
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED
CAUTION: OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
If any of the above error messages appear, you have exceeded approximately +3 dBm at
one of the input ports. The RF output power is automatically turned o. The annotation
P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has
been activated. To reset the analyzer's power and regain control of the power level, do the
following:
1. Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to the input.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-1.
3. Press 4MENU5 POWER 405 4215 POWER TRIP OFF to return the power level to the preset state.
If the power trip indicator (P) does not reappear, recongure the test setup to keep input
power levels at 0 dBm or below.
If P reappears, continue with \Check the R, A, and B inputs."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8-2 Receiver Troubleshooting
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Check the R, A, and B inputs
Good inputs produce traces similar to Figure 8-2 in terms of atness. To examine each input
trace, do the following:
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-1. (The thru cable is HP part number
8120-4781.)
Figure SETUP8 here.
Figure 8-1. Equipment Setup
2. Check the atness of the input R trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8-2.
Note
The R trace will be 20 dB lower than the A and B trace due to the attenuator
on the R input. The atness of the trace, however, should resemble that of the
A and B input traces.
Press 4PRESET5 4MEAS5 R 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
3. Check the atness of the input A trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8-2.
Press 4MEAS5 A .
4. Check the atness of the input B trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8-2.
Move the A input cable to the B input and press B .
If none of the input traces resembles Figure 8-2, continue with \Troubleshooting When
All Inputs Look Bad."
If at least one input trace resembles Figure 8-2, continue with \Troubleshooting When
One or More Inputs Look Good."
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Receiver Troubleshooting 8-3
Figure GOOD8 here.
Figure 8-2. Typical Good Trace
Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad
Run Internal Tests 18 and 17
1. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4185 4215 EXECUTE TEST to run the ADC
oset.
2. Then, when the analyzer nishes test 18, press 4175 4215 EXECUTE TEST to run the ADC
linearity test.
If either of these tests FAIL, the A10 assembly is probably faulty. This can be conrmed by
checking the 4 MHz signal and substituting the A10 assembly or checking the signals listed in
Table 8-1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Check 2nd LO
Check the 2nd LO signal. Refer to the \A12 Reference Check" section of Chapter 7, \Source
Troubleshooting" for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform
illustrations.
If the analyzer passes the checks, continue to \Check the 4 MHz REF Signal."
If the analyzer fails the checks, perform the high/low band transition adjustment. If the
adjustment fails, or brings no improvement, replace A12.
8-4 Receiver Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Check the 4 MHz REF Signal
1. Connect a cable from the RF OUT to input R.
2. Press 4PRESET5.
3. Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at A10P2-6.
If the signal does not resemble Figure 8-3, troubleshoot the signal source (A12P2-36) and
path.
If the signal is good, the probability is greater than 90% that the A10 assembly is faulty.
For conrmation, perform \Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination."
Figure WAVE8 here.
Figure 8-3. 4 MHz REF Waveform
Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination
If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly, check the A10 assembly by
one of the following methods:
Substitute another A10 assembly or
Check the signal/control lines required for its operation. The pins and signal sources of
those lines are identied in Table 8-1. It is possible that the A9 assembly may not be
providing the necessary signals. These signal checks allow you to determine which assembly
is faulty. Some of the waveforms are illustrated by Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5.
If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals are valid,
continue with \Check the 4 kHz Signal." Otherwise troubleshoot the suspect signal(s) or
consider the A10 assembly faulty.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Receiver Troubleshooting 8-5
Mnemonic
Table 8-1. Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation
Description
DIFD0
Digital IF data 0 (LSB)
DIFD1
Digital IF data 1
DIFD2
Digital IF data 2
DIFD3
Digital IF data 3
DIFD4
Digital IF data 4
DIFD5
Digital IF data 5
DIFD6
Digital IF data 6
DIFD7
Digital IF data 7 (MSB)
L DIFEN0
Digital IF enable 0
L DIFEN1
Digital IF enable 1
L DIFEN2
Digital IF enable 2
DIFCC
Digital IF conversion comp.
DIFCLK
Digital IF serial clock
Digital IF serial data out
DIF DATA
L ENDIF
L=enable digital IF
L INTCOP
L=interrupt, DSP
*Check for TTL activity.
8-6 Receiver Troubleshooting
A10
Location
P2-27
P2-57
P2-28
P2-58
P2-29
P2-59
P2-30
P2-60
P2-34
P2-5
P2-35
P2-33
P2-4
P2-3
P2-17
P2-2
Signal
Source
A9P2-27
A9P2-57
A9P2-28
A9P2-58
A9P2-29
A9P2-59
A9P2-30
A9P2-60
A9P2-34
A9P2-5
A9P2-35
A10P2-33
A10P2-4
A10P2-3
A9P2-17
A10P2-2
See
Figure
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-5
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure DATAL8 here.
Figure 8-4. Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger
Figure CNTRL8 here.
Figure 8-5. Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Receiver Troubleshooting 8-7
Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good
Since at least one input is good, all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the multiplexer is
functional. Only the status of the individual sampler/mixers and their individual signal paths
is undetermined.
Check the 4 kHz Signal
1. Connect a cable from the RF OUT to input R.
2. Press 4PRESET5 4MENU5 CW FREQ .
3. Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler/mixer in question at the A10
assembly. The input and output access pins are listed in Table 8-2. The signal should
resemble the waveform of Figure 8-6.
If the signal is good, continue with \Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction
Constants O."
If the signal is bad, skip ahead to \Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Mnemonic
IFR
IFA
IFB
Table 8-2. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Signal Locations
Description
4 kHz
4 kHz
4 kHz
A10 Location
A10P1-1, 31
A10P1-4, 34
A10P1-7, 37
Signal Source
A4P1-6
A5P1-6
A6P1-6
Figure IFWAVE8 here.
Figure 8-6. 2nd IF (4 kHz) Waveform
8-8 Receiver Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off
1. Press 4PRESET5 4MEAS5 4A5 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
2. The trace is currently being displayed with the sampler correction constants on and should
resemble Figure 8-7a.
3. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF .
4. The trace is now being displayed with sampler correction constants o and should have
worsened to resemble Figure 8-7b.
5. Press 4SAMPLER COR ON5. The trace should improve and resemble Figure 8-7a again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
When the correction constants are switched o, an absolute oset and
bandswitch points may be evident.
If the trace shows no improvement when the sampler correction constants are toggled from
o to on, perform the \Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants (Test 53)"
adjustment described in Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction Constants." If the trace
remains bad after this adjustment, the A10 assembly is defective.
Figure TRACE8 here.
Figure 8-7. Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Off
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Receiver Troubleshooting 8-9
Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer
If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler/mixer assembly, check the 1st LO signal where it
enters the sampler/mixer assembly in question.
If the 1st LO is faulty, check the 1st LO signal at its output connector on the A7 assembly
to determine if the failure is in the cable or the assembly.
If the 1st LO is good, continue with \Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer."
Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler/Mixer
Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identied in Table 8-3. Refer to the \A12 Reference
Check" in Chapter 7, \Source Troubleshooting," for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the
2nd LO and waveform illustrations. Table 8-3 identies the signal location at the samplers
and the A12 assembly.
Table 8-3. 2nd LO Locations
Mnemonic
Description
2nd LO 1
2nd LO 2
2nd LO (0 degrees)
2nd LO (090 degrees)
Sampler
Location
A4/5/6 P1-11
A4/5/6 P1-4
Signal
Source
A12P1-2, 32
A12P1-4, 34
If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler/mixer, the sampler/mixer assembly is faulty. Otherwise,
troubleshoot the A12 assembly and associated signal path.
8-10 Receiver Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Contents
9.
Accessories Troubleshooting
Assembly Replacement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect the System's Connectors and Calibration Devices .
Switch Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect the Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Shorts and Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Power Problems in S-Parameter Test Sets .
Troubleshooting Control Problems in S-Parameter Test Sets
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-6
9-8
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Contents-1
Figures
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables . . .
Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b)
Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer Rear Panel Test Set Interconnect Connector Pins .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-1. Components Related to Specic Error Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2. Attenuation Voltage Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3. Measurement Voltage Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
9-8
9-9
Tables
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
9
Accessories Troubleshooting
Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow the
procedures in the order given, unless instructed otherwise.
Measurement failures can be divided into two categories:
Failures which don't aect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render incorrect
measurement data.
Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a
feature.
This chapter addresses the rst category of failures which are usually caused by the following:
operator errors
faulty calibration devices or connectors
bad cables or adapters
improper calibration techniques
RF cabling problems within the test set
These failures are checked using the following procedures:
\Inspect the Accessories"
\Inspect the Error Terms"
\Test Set Troubleshooting"
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Accessories Troubleshooting 9-1
Assembly Replacement Sequence
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network
Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
9-2 Accessories Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Inspect the Accessories
Inspect the System's Connectors and Calibration Devices
1. Check for damaged mating interfaces and loose connector bulkheads on the analyzer's front
panel connectors.
2. Check the test set and power splitter connectors for defects as well.
3. Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical
damage. Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for information on
gaging and inspecting the device connectors.
If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance, replace the
device.
Switch Repeatability
Calibration does not compensate for the repeatability of the mechanical transfer switch in the
S-parameter test sets, so the switch can be a source of error. However, most switch failures
are not subtle: no action.
Connect the test set to the analyzer. Press 4PRESET5 4MEAS5 Refl: REV S22 (B/R) and then
Refl: FWD S11 (A/R) . Listen for the sound of the switch.
No sound: conrm that the test set has a solid-state (noiseless) switch, then refer to \Test
Set Troubleshooting" to locate the problem.
Audible sound: continue with this section unless a subtle failure is suspected. To
troubleshoot subtle failures, refer to the test set manual.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Inspect the Error Terms
Error terms are a measure of a \system": a network analyzer, calibration kit, and any cables
used. As required, refer to Chapter 11, \Error Terms" for the following:
The specic measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms.
The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument.
Typical error term data.
Use Table 9-1 to cross-reference error term data to system faults.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Accessories Troubleshooting 9-3
Table 9-1. Components Related to Specific Error Terms
Component
Directivity
Source
Match
Reection
Tracking
Isolation
Load
Match
Transmission
Tracking
Calibration Kit
load
X
open/short
X
X
connectors
X
X
X
X
X
X
bridge
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
step attenuator
X
X
X
X
power splitter
X
X
X
X
Test Set
bias tee
transfer switch
X
Analyzer
sampler
A10 digital IF
External cables
X
X
X
X
X
X
If you detect problems using error term analysis, use the following approach to isolate the
fault:
Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms. If those
terms are incorrect, go to \Cable Test."
Verify the calibration kit devices:
Loads: If the directivity error term looks good, the load and the test port are good.
If directivity looks bad, connect the same load on the other test port and measure its
directivity. If the second port looks bad, as if the problem had shifted with the load,
replace the load. If the second port looks good, as if the load had not been the problem,
troubleshoot the rst port.
Shorts and opens: If the source match and reection tracking terms look good, the shorts
and the opens are good. If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms look good,
proceed to \Verify Shorts and Opens."
Cable Test
The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems. You can further verify
a faulty cable by measuring the reection of the cable. Perform an S11 1-port calibration
directly at port 1 (no cables). Then connect the suspect cable to port 1 and terminate the
open end in 50 ohms.
Figure 9-1 shows the return loss trace of a good (left side) and faulty cable. Note that the
important characteristic of a cable trace is its level (the good cable trace is much lower) not
its regularity. Refer to the cable manual for return loss specications.
9-4 Accessories Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Figure LOSS9 here.
Figure 9-1. Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables
Verify Shorts and Opens
Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short
and open in question. If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits,
refer to the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User's Guide for information on how to use the
MODIFY CAL KIT function. Set aside the short and open that are causing the problem.
1. Perform an S11 1-port calibration using the good short and open. Then press FORMAT
SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format.
2. Connect the good short to port 1. Press 4SCALE REF5 ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the front
panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left
side of the circle (see Figure 9-2a, left).
Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1. The trace of the questionable
short should appear very similar to the known good short.
3. Connect the good open to port 1. Press 4SCALE REF5 ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the front
panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right
side of the circle (see Figure 9-2b, right).
Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1. The trace of the questionable
open should appear very similar to the known good open.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Accessories Troubleshooting 9-5
Figure SMITH9 here.
Figure 9-2. Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short (a) and Open (b)
Test Set Troubleshooting
Test set problems are of three varieties: RF problems, power problems and control problems.
The HP 85044A/B can only experience RF problems as it is not powered or controlled by the
analyzer.
To troubleshoot:
The HP 85044A/B: refer to its manual.
S-parameter test set RF problems: refer to their manuals.
S-parameter power or control problems: continue with \Troubleshooting Power Problems in
S-Parameter Test Sets" (power problems can aect control).
Troubleshooting Power Problems in S-Parameter Test Sets
HP 8753D Option 011 with HP 85047A or 85046A/B
Do not connect the test set to the analyzer to perform these checks.
1. Move the A9 CC Jumper to the ALTER position:
Remove the power line cord from the analyzer.
Set the analyzer on its side.
Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T-15 TORX
screwdriver.
Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover's back edge.
Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument.
9-6 Accessories Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Move the jumper to the ALT position as shown in Figure 9-3.
Replace the bottom cover, corner bumpers, and power cord.
Figure JUMP9 here.
Figure 9-3. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU
2. Press 4PRESET5 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU PEEK/POKE ADDRESS 413144125 4215.
3. \POKE" the address for the appropriate test set:
HP 85047A: Press POKE 455 4215 4PRESET5.
HP 85046A/B: Press POKE 415 4215 4PRESET5.
4. Measure the DC voltage at pin 14 (see Figure 9-4) of the analyzer rear panel test set
interconnect connector.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure INTER9 here.
Figure 9-4. Analyzer Rear Panel Test Set Interconnect Connector Pins
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Accessories Troubleshooting 9-7
If the voltage is between 21.3 V and 22.7 V, the supply is good. Proceed with either of
the following:
a. Refer to the test set manual to troubleshoot the test set and its interconnect cable
(especially if the test set LEDs don't light).
b. Continue with \Troubleshooting Control Problems in S-Parameter Test Sets."
If the voltage is not as stated above, refer to Chapter 5, \Power Supply
Troubleshooting."
5. Be certain to press POKE 405 4215 4PRESET5 after all troubleshooting and return the A9 CC
jumper to \normal" position.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Troubleshooting Control Problems in S-Parameter Test Sets
The analyzer controls the test set attenuator, the transfer switch (for forward and reverse
measurements), and, in the case of the HP 85047A, bypasses the frequency doubler. The
associated test set interconnect connector pins are shown in Figure 9-4; refer to it as needed.
Before continuing with these procedures, be sure the A9 CC jumper is set to
\alter" and the value for the appropriate test set has been \POKEd".
Note
Attenuation Control Voltages. Voltage levels on the pins identied in Table 9-2 control test
set attenuation. Press 4MENU5 POWER ATTENUATOR PORT 1 and enter the attenuation values
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
listed below. After each entry, check the pins (see Figure 9-4) for the indicated voltages.
Table 9-2. Attenuation Voltage Matrix
Attenuation
HP 85046A/B
PIN
PIN
11
22
PIN
23
PIN
8
HP 85047A
PIN
PIN
11
22
PIN
23
0
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
10
+5
0
+5
+5
+5
0
+5
20
+5
+5
0
+5
+5
+5
0
30
+5
0
0
+5
+5
0
0
40
0
+5
+5
+5
0
+5
+5
50
0
0
+5
+5
0
0
+5
60
0
+5
0
+5
0
+5
0
70
0
0
0
+5
0
0
0
Proper voltages: refer to the test set manual to continue troubleshooting. For HP 85047A
systems, rst see HP 85047A Note, above, to reset the analyzer.
Wrong voltages: replace the A16 rear panel assembly of the analyzer.
9-8 Accessories Troubleshooting
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Voltage levels on the pins identied in Table 9-3 control
measurement direction (forward or reverse) and the doubler o function. Press 4MEAS5
S PARAMETERS and enter the measurements listed below. After each entry, check the pins (see
Figure 9-4) for the indicated voltages. In similar fashion, change the frequency range to 6 GHz
or 3 GHz by pressing 4SYSTEM5 FREQ RANGE 3GHz6GHz and check the pins for the indicated
voltages.
Measurement Control Signals.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 9-3. Measurement Voltage Matrix
HP 85046A/B
Pin 8
Re: FWD S11 (A/R)
Trans: FWD S21 (B/R)
Trans: REV S12 (B/R)
Re: REV S22 (A/R)
Doubler OFF
+5
+5
0
0
0
Pin 8
0
0
0
0
0
HP 85047A
Pin 22
Pin 23
0
0
0
0
+5
+5
0
0
+5
0
Proper voltages: refer to the test set manual to continue troubleshooting. For HP 85047A
systems, rst see HP 85047A Note, above, to reset the analyzer.
Wrong voltages: replace the A16 rear panel assembly of the analyzer.
Remote Trigger. Monitor pin 24 with an oscilloscope. Press 4PRESET5: +5 V should be
present during PRESET. After PRESET a negative-going pulse to zero volts, about 200
nanoseconds long, should be visible. The pulse should be present at the beginning of each
sweep. To increase pulse visibility, decrease number of points to 3 and decrease sweep time to
50 milliseconds on the analyzer.
Proper pulse: troubleshoot the test set by referring to its manual. For HP 85047A systems,
rst see HP 85047A Note, above, to reset the analyzer.
Incorrect pulse: replace the analyzer A16 rear panel assembly.
Sweep Delay. This signal delays the start of the analyzer's sweep to allow for test set switch
settling time. It also distinguishes, by encoding, the HP 85047A from the 85046A/B test sets.
See the test set manual for more detail. For HP 85047A systems, rst see HP 85047A Note,
above, to reset the analyzer.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:13
Accessories Troubleshooting 9-9
Contents
10. Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Key Menus - Internal Diagnostics
Tests Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Options Menu . . . . . . . . .
Edit List Menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Self Diagnose Softkey . . . . . . . .
Test Descriptions . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Tests . . . . . . . . . .
External Tests . . . . . . . . . .
System Verication Tests . . . . .
Adjustment Tests . . . . . . . . .
Display Tests . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Key Menus - Service Features . .
Service Modes Menu . . . . . . . .
Service Modes More Menu . . . . . .
Analog Bus . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the Analog Bus . . .
The Main ADC . . . . . . . . . .
The Frequency Counter . . . . . .
Analog In Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Nodes . . . . . . . . .
A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . .
A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . .
A11 Phase Lock . . . . . . . . .
A12 Reference . . . . . . . . . .
A14 Fractional-N (Digital) . . . . .
PEEK/POKE Menu . . . . . . . .
Firmware Revision Softkey . . . . . . .
HP-IB Service Mnemonic Denitions . .
Invoking Tests Remotely . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Codes . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-6
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-11
10-13
10-13
10-15
10-16
10-16
10-16
10-17
10-17
10-19
10-19
10-26
10-27
10-31
10-35
10-37
10-39
10-40
10-40
10-40
10-42
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Contents-1
Figures
10-1.
10-2.
10-3.
10-4.
10-5.
10-6.
10-7.
10-8.
10-9.
10-10.
10-11.
10-12.
10-13.
10-14.
10-15.
10-16.
10-17.
Internal Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU . . . . . . . . . .
Service Feature Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Readout Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Bus Node 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-2
10-7
10-13
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-23
10-24
10-25
10-28
10-29
10-30
10-31
10-33
10-36
10-37
10-39
10-1. Test Status Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2. Descriptions of Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3
10-6
Tables
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
10
Service Key Menus and Error Messages
Service Key Menus
These menus allow you to perform the following service functions:
test
verify
adjust
control
troubleshoot
The menus are divided into two groups:
1. Internal Diagnostics
2. Service Features
When applicable, the HP-IB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the key. See HP-IB
Service Mnemonic Denitions at the end of this section.
Error Messages
The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this chapter to help
you:
Understand the message.
Solve the problem.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-1
Service Key Menus - Internal Diagnostics
The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10-1 and described in the following
paragraphs. The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TESTS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TEST OPTIONS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SELF-DIAGNOSE
Figure INTDIAG here.
Figure 10-1. Internal Diagnostics Menus
Note
Throughout this service guide, these conventions are observed:
are labeled front panel keys.
SOFTKEYS display dened keys (in the menus).
(HP-IB COMMANDS) When applicable, follow the keystroke in
parentheses.
4HARDKEYS5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Tests Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TESTS (TEST [D])
Note
Accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute the service
tests. The default is set to internal test 1.
Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under the heading Test
Descriptions in the following pages.
The tests are divided by function into the following categories:
Internal Tests (1|20)
External Tests (21|26)
System Verication Tests (27|43)
10-2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Adjustment Tests (44|57)
Display Tests (59|65)
To access the rst test in each category, press the category softkey. To access the other tests,
use the numeric keypad, step keys or front panel knob. The test number, name, and status
abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display.
Table 10-1 shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display, its denition,
and the equivalent HP-IB code. The HP-IB command to output the test status of the
most recently executed test is OUTPTESS. For more information, refer to \HP-IB Service
Mnemonic Denitions" located at the end of this chapter.
Table 10-1. Test Status Terms
Display Abbreviation
Denition
HP-IB Code
PASS
PASS
0
FAIL
FAIL
1
-IP-
IN PROGRESS
2
(NA)
NOT AVAILABLE
3
-ND-
NOT DONE
4
DONE
DONE
5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXECUTE TEST (EXET)
Runs the selected test and may display these softkeys:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CONTINUE (TESR1) Continues the selected test.
NNNNNNNNNNN
YES (TESR2) Alters correction constants during adjustment
tests.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NEXT (TESR4) Displays the next choice.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SELECT (TESR6) Chooses the option indicated.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ABORT (TESR8) Terminates the test and returns to the tests
menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
INTERNAL TESTS
Evaluates the analyzer's internal operation. These tests are
completely internal and do not require external connections or user
interaction.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Evaluates the analyzer's external operation. These additional tests
require some user interaction (such as keystrokes).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Veries the analyzer system operation by examining the contents
of the measurement calibration arrays. The procedure is in the
\System Verication and Performance Tests" chapter. Information
about the calibration arrays is provided in the \Error Terms"
chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Generates and stores the correction constants. For more
information, refer to the \Adjustments" chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Checks for correct operation of the GSP board.
EXTERNAL TESTS
SYS VER TESTS
ADJUSTMENT TESTS
DISPLAY TESTS
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-3
Test Options Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TEST OPTIONS
Accesses softkeys that aect the way tests (routines) run, or
supply necessary additional data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CONTINUE TEST (TESR1) Resumes the test from where it was stopped.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Toggles the repeat function on and o. When the function is ON,
the selected test will run 10,000 times unless you press any key to
stop it. The analyzer shows the current number of passes and fails.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Toggles the record function on and o. When the function is
ON, certain test results are sent to a printer via HP-IB. This is
especially useful for correction constants. The instrument must be
in system controller mode or pass control mode to print. (Refer to
the \Printing, Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results" chapter
in the HP 8753D User's Guide .)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL (tighter) limits for the
Operator's Check. The SPCL limits are useful for a guard band.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Activates power loss function.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Accesses the power loss/sensor lists menu:
REPEAT on OFF (TO2)
RECORD on OFF (TO1)
LIMITS[NORM/SPCL]
POWER LOSS on OFF
LOSS/SENSR LISTS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
USE SENSOR A/B Selects the A or B power sensor calibration
factor list for use in power meter calibration measurements.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A (CALFSENA) Accesses the Edit List
menu to allow modication of the calibration data table for
power sensor A.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B (CALFSENB) Accesses the Edit List
menu to allow modication of the calibration data table for
power sensor B.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
POWER LOSS (POWLLIST) Accesses the Edit List menu to
allow modication of the external power loss data table that
corrects coupled-arm power loss when a directional coupler
samples the RF output.
10-4 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Edit List Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS/SENSR LISTS
and then press one of the following: CAL FACTOR SENSOR A or CAL FACTOR SENSOR B or
POWER LOSS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selects a segment (frequency point) to be edited, deleted from, or
added to the current data table. Works with the entry controls.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Allows modication of frequency, cal factor and loss values
previously entered in the current data table.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Deletes frequency, cal factor and loss values previously entered in
the current data table.
NNNNNNNNNNN
Adds new frequency, cal factor and loss values to the current data
table up to a maximum of 12 segments (frequency points, PTS).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Deletes the entire current data table (or list) when YES is pressed.
Press NO to avoid deletion.
SEGMENT
EDIT (SEDI[D])
DELETE (SDEL)
ADD (SADD)
CLEAR LIST (CLEL)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE (EDITDONE)
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNN
Returns to the previous menu.
Self Diagnose Softkey
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing, 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU
SELF DIAGNOSE . This function examines, in order, the pass/fail status of all internal tests
and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If a failure is detected, the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably faulty
and assigns a failure probability factor to each assembly.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-5
Test Descriptions
The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test, verify, and adjust the instrument. This section
describes those tests.
Internal Tests
This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction. All return a
PASS or FAIL condition. All of these tests run on power-up and PRESET except as noted.
0
ALL INT. Runs only when selected. It consists of internal tests 3-11, 13-16, and 20.
1
PRESET. Runs the following subset of internal tests: rst,the ROM/RAM tests 2,
Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed. If all pass,
the test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset retains its own test status.
3, and 4; then tests 5 through 11, 14, 15, and 16. If any of these tests fail, this test
returns a FAIL status. Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see
which failed. If all pass, this test displays a PASS status. Each test in the subset
retains its own test status. This same subset is available over HP-IB as \TST?". It is
not performed upon remote preset.
2
ROM. Part of the ROM/RAM tests and cannot be run separately. Refer to the
3
CMOS RAM. Veries the A9 CPU CMOS (long-term) memory with a
4
Main DRAM. Veries the A9 CPU main memory (DRAM) with a non-destructive
\Digital Control Troubleshooting" chapter for more information.
non-destructive write/read pattern. A destructive version that writes over stored data
is shown in Table 10-2.
write/read test pattern. A destructive version is shown in Table 10-2. These tests,
internal tests 2 through 4, are normally run at preset and power-on (see NORMAL,
below). However, a jumper on the A9 CPU assembly, illustrated in Figure 10-2, can
be set in one of ve positions with the following results:
Table 10-2. Descriptions of Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Position
No
Result
ALTER
1
With the jumper in this right position, correction constants can be
altered, (updated) during adjustment procedures. The altered
correction constants are stored in EEPROM, replacing previously
stored correction constants.
CMOS
2
This destructive version of the CMOS RAM test (internal test 3)
continuously writes over information stored there.
DRAM
3
This destructive version of the main DRAM test (internal test 4)
continuously writes over information stored there.
SKIP
4
For factory use only.
NORMAL
5
The left position is the normal operation position.
10-6 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure JUMPLOC here.
Figure 10-2. Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU
Jumper positions 1 to 5 run right to left.
For additional information, see \Internal Tests" (near the front of this section) and
the \Digital Control Troubleshooting" chapter.
5
DSP Wr/Rd. Veries the ability of the main processor and the DSP (digital signal
6
DSP RAM. Veries the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by
7
DSP ALU. Veries the A9 CPU high-speed math processing portions of the digital
8
processor), both on the A9 CPU assembly, to communicate with each other through
DRAM. This also veries that programs can be loaded to the DSP, and that most of
the main RAM access circuits operate correctly.
using a write/read pattern.
signal processor.
DSP Intrpt. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to respond to
interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC.
9
DIF Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the
10
DIF Counter. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the
11
12
control latches on the A10 digital IF.
triple divider on the A10 CPU. It tests the A9 CPU data buers and A10 digital IF,
the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference.
DSP Control. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to write to the
control latches on the A10 digital IF. Feedback is veried by the main processor. It
primarily tests the A10 digital IF, but failures may be caused by the A9 CPU.
Fr Pan Wr/Rd. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the
front panel processor. It tests the A2 front panel interface and processor,and A9 CPU
data buering and address decoding. (See also tests 23 and 24 below.) This runs only
when selected.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-7
13
Rear Panel. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the
14
Post Reg. Polls the status register of the A8 post-regulator, and ags these
15
Frac N Cont. Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write/read to the
16
Sweep Trig. Tests the sweep trigger (L SWP) line from the A14 fractional-N to the
17
ADC Lin. Tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built-in ramp
18
ADC Ofs. This runs only when selected. It tests the ability of the oset DAC, on the
19
ABUS Test. Tests analog bus accuracy, by measuring several analog bus reference
20
rear panel control elements. It tests the A16 rear panel, and A9 CPU data buering
and address decoding. (It does not test the HP-IB interface; for that see the HP-IB
Programming Guide .) This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL.
conditions: heat sink too hot, inadequate air ow, or post-regulated supply shutdown.
control element on the A14 fractional-N (digital) assembly. The control element
must be functioning, and the fractional-N VCO must be oscillating (although not
necessarily phase-locked) to pass.
A10 digital IF. The receiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWP.
generator. The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity, where each data
point represents the relative \width" of a particular ADC code. Ideally, all codes
have the same width; dierent widths correspond to non-linearities.
A10 digital IF, to apply a bias oset to the IF signals before the ADC input. This
runs only when selected.
voltages (all nodes from the A10 digital IF). This runs only when selected.
FN Count. Uses the internal counter to count the A14 fractional-N VCO frequency
(120 to 240 MHz) and the divided fractional-N frequency (100 kHz). It requires the
100 kHz signal from A12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass.
External Tests
These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator interaction of some
kind to run. Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel checks, more complete than test
12, that checks the front panel keys and knob entry.
21
Port 1 Op Chk. Part of the \Operator's Check" procedure, located in the \Start
22
Port 2 Op Chk. Same as 21, but tests PORT 2.
23
Fr Pan Seq. Tests the front panel knob entry and all A1 front panel keys, as well as
24
Fr Pan Diag. Similar to 23 above, but the user rotates the front panel knob or presses
25
ADC Hist. Factory use only.
26
Source Ex. Factory use only.
Troubleshooting" chapter. The procedure requires the external connection of a short
to PORT 1.
the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly. It prompts the user to rotate the
front panel knob, then press each key in an ordered sequence. It continues to the next
prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satised.
the keys in any order. This test displays the command the instrument received.
10-8 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
System Verification Tests
These tests apply mainly to system-level, error-corrected verication and troubleshooting.
Tests 27 to 31 are associated with the system verication procedure, documented in the
\System Verication and Performance Tests" chapter. Tests 32 to 43 facilitate examining the
calibration coecient arrays (error terms) resulting from a measurement calibration; refer to
the \Error Terms" chapter for details.
27
Sys Ver Init. Recalls the initialization state for system verication from disk, in
28
Ver Dev 1. Recalls verication limits from disk for verication device #1 in all
applicable S-parameter measurements. It performs pass/fail limit testing of the
current measurement.
29
Ver Dev 2. Same as 27 above for device #2.
30
Ver Dev 3. Same as 27 above for device #3.
31
Ver Dev 4. Same as 27 above for device #4.
32-43
Cal Coef 1-12. Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to
display memory. A measurement calibration must be complete and active. The
denition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type. After
execution, the memory is automatically displayed. Refer to the \Error Term" chapter
for details.
preparation for a measurement calibration. It must be done before 28, 29, 30 or 31
are performed.
Adjustment Tests
The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the \Adjustments" chapter
of this manual, except as noted.
44
*Source Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary source power
accuracy. Use this test before running test 47, below.
45
*Pretune Def. Writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock
46
ABUS Cor. Measures three xed voltages on the ABUS, and generates new
pretuning accuracy. Use this test before running test 48, below.
correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low
resolution modes. Use this test before running test 48, below.
47
Source Cor. Measures source output power accuracy, atness, and linearity against
an external power meter via HP-IB to generate new correction constants. Run tests
44, 45, 46, and 48 rst.
48
Pretune Cor. Generates source pretune values for proper phase-locked loop
operation. Run tests 44, 45, and 46 rst.
49
Intensity Cor. Stores the current values of the intensity adjustments, under 4DISPLAY5,
50
Disp 2 Ex. Not used in \Adjustments." Writes the \secondary test pattern" to the
51
IF Step Cor. Measures the gain of the IF ampliers (A and B only) located on the
for recall of display intensity values at power-on.
display for adjustments. Press 4PRESET5 to exit this routine.
A10 digital IF, to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-9
It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute amplitude accuracy in the 030
dBm input power region.
52
ADC Ofs Cor. Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics, using an
53
Sampler Cor. Measures the absolute amplitude response of the R sampler against an
54
Cav Osc Cor. Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the instrument
55
Serial Cor. Stores the serial number (input by the user in the Display Title menu) in
56
Option Cor. Stores the option keyword (required for Option 002, 006, 010 or any
57
Cal Kit Def. Not used.
58
Init EEPROM. This test initializes the EEPROM.
internal ramp generator, and stores values for the optimal operating region. During
measurement, IF signals are centered in the optimal region to improve low-level
dynamic accuracy.
external power meter via HP-IB, then compares A and B, (magnitude and phase),
against R. It improves the R input accuracy and A/B/R tracking.
temperature for eective spur avoidance.
EEPROM. This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number.
combination).
Display Tests
These tests do not return a PASS/FAIL condition. All six amber front panel LEDs will turn
o if the test passes. The display will be blank; press 4PRESET5 to exit the test. If any of the
six LEDs remain on, the test has failed.
59
Disp/cpu com. Checks to conrm that the CPU can communicate with the A19 GSP
60
DRAM cell. Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and
61
Main VRAM. Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and
62
VRAM bank. Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks.
63
VRAM/video. Veries that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and
read shift register transfers. It also checks the video signals LHSYNC, LVSYNC, and
LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling.
64
RGB outputs. Conrms that the analog video signals are correct and it veries their
65
Inten DAC. Veries that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high.
board. The CPU writes all zeros, all ones, and then a walking 1 pattern to the GSP
and reads them back. If the test fails, the CPU repeats the walking 1 pattern until
4PRESET5 is pressed.
then verifying that it can be read back.
then writing all ones to one location in each bank. Finally a walking one pattern is
written to one location in each bank.
functionality.
10-10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Test Patterns
Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments, diagnostics, and
troubleshooting, but they are not used for eld service. Test patterns are executed by entering
the test number (66 through 80), then pressing EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE . The test pattern
will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked. To exit the test pattern and return the
softkey labels, press softkey 8 (bottom softkey). The following is a description of the test
patterns.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
66
Test pat 1. Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the
A18 display and checks for color purity. In this, and other solid test patterns, an
extremely thin full-screen horizontal line will be seen about 1/4 screen height from
the bottom. This condition is characteristic of the display and does not indicate any
problem.
67-69
Test Pat 2-4. Displays a red, green, and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of
70
Displays a 16-step gray scale for verifying that the palette chip on the
A19 GSP board can produce 16 dierent amplitudes of color (in this case, white).
This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting. The
staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits.
71
Test Pat 6. Displays a 3-step gray scale pattern for adjusting the background level
72
Test Pat 7. Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color
73-74
the display and also the ability to independently control each gun color. If the purity
of the displayed test pattern is a problem, it usually indicates that the face of the
display needs to be de-gaussed (de-magnetized). If purity is bad, cycling the power
a few times may cure the problem. If this does not work, a commercially available
de-magnetizer must be used.
Test Pat 5.
(or 0 step) so that the rst bar is not visible, and the second bar is just barely visible.
This pattern consists of the rst three gray scale bars of the 16-step gray scale.
convergence. It is mainly for use by the factory, since convergence cannot be adjusted
in the eld.
Test Pat 8-9. Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color
convergence, linearity, alignment, and high voltage regulation, in the factory only. No
eld adjustments are possible.
75
Test Pat 10. Displays an H pattern for checking the focus of the display. Under
normal conditions, this should never need to be adjusted. However, it is possible to
adjust it by accessing the focus control adjustment at the left rear of the display. See
the \Adjustments" chapter.
76
Test Pat 11. Veries the functionality of the pixel stretching circuit of the A19
GSP board. Under normal conditions, this pattern should appear all white. If a
failure occurs in the pixel stretching circuit, the pattern will consist of 16 alternating
white and gray vertical stripes. Suspect problems with the STRETCH line and
LFIRSTPIX.
77
Test Pat 12. Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting, using an
oscilloscope. It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across
the screen. Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps
(instead of one staircase) between each horizontal sync pulse. This pattern is used to
troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the A19 GSP board.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-11
78
Test Pat 13. Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A19
79
Test Pat 14. Displays a character set for showing the user all the dierent types and
80
Test Pat 15. Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the display.
GSP board to display 15 colors plus white. The numbers written below each bar
indicate the tint number used to produce that bar (0 & 100=pure red, 33=pure
green, 67=pure blue).
sizes of characters available. Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three
character sizes. 125 characters of each size are displayed. Characters 0 and 3 cannot
be drawn and several others are really control characters (such as carriage return and
line feed).
It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes. Each stripe should
be clearly visible. A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together. This
adjustment can be performed in the factory only.
10-12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus - Service Features
The service feature menus are shown in Figure 10-3 and described in the following paragraphs.
The following keys access the service feature menus:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MODES
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANALOG BUS on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEEK/POKE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FIRMWARE REVISION
Figure SERVFEAT here.
Figure 10-3. Service Feature Menus
Service Modes Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Allows you to control and monitor various circuits for
troubleshooting.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Tests the A13 and A14 fractional-N circuits. It allows you
to directly control and monitor the output frequency of the
fractional-N synthesizer (10 MHz to 60 MHz). Set the instrument
to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE ON.
SERVICE MODES
FRACN TUNE on OFF
(SM1)
Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob. The output
of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J1 HI OUT (in high
band) or A14J2 LO OUT (in low band) with an oscilloscope,
a frequency counter, or a spectrum analyzer. Signal jumps
and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz when tuning
up in frequency, and at 29.2 MHz and 15 MHz when tuning
down, are due to switching of the digital divider. This mode
can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as described in \Source
Troubleshooting" chapter.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-13
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SRC ADJUST MENU
Accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SRC TUNE on OFF Tests the pretune functions of the phase lock
and source assemblies. Use the entry controls to set RF OUT to
any frequency from 300 KHz to 3 GHz. When in this mode:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Set analyzer to CW frequency before pressing SRC TUNE ON .
2. RF OUT is 1 MHz to 6 MHz above indicated (entered)
frequency.
3. Instrument does not attempt to phase lock.
4. Residual FM increases.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SRC TUNE FREQ
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ALC ON off Toggles the automatic leveling control (ALC) on
and o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MAIN PWR DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SLOPE DAC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SRC ADJUST DACS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
HB FLTR SW on OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SOURCE PLL ON off
(SM3)
With this mode switched OFF, the source stays in the pretune
mode and does not attempt to complete the phase lock sequence.
Also, all phase lock error messages are disabled. The fractional-N
circuits and the receiver operate normally. Therefore, the
instrument sweeps, but the source is being driven by the pretune
DAC in a stair-stepped fashion.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLL AUTO ON off (SM4) Automatically attempts to determine new pretune values when the
instrument encounters phase lock problems (e.g. \harmonic skip").
With PLL AUTO OFF the frequencies and voltages are not changing
as they are when they are attempting to determine new pretune
values, so troubleshooting the phase-locked loop circuits is more
convenient.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLL DIAG on OFF (SM5) Displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band.
This sequence normally occurs very rapidly, making it dicult
to troubleshoot phase lock problems. Switching this mode ON
slows the process down, allowing you to inspect the steps of the
phase lock sequence (pretune, acquire, and track) by pausing at
each step. The steps are indicated on the display, along with the
channel (C1 or C2) and band number (B1 through B13).
This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the process at
any step. It can also be used with the analog bus counter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLL PAUSE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Used only with PLL DIAG mode. CONT indicates that it will
continuously cycle through all steps of the phase lock sequence.
PAUSE holds it at any step of interest. This mode is useful for
troubleshooting phase-locked loop problems.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE
Accesses the service modes more menu listed below.
10-14 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Modes More Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SAMPLER COR ON off
(SM6)
Toggles the sampler correction ON, for normal operation, or OFF,
for diagnosis or adjustment purposes.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Normal operating condition and works in conjunction with IF
GAIN ON and OFF. The A10 assembly includes a switchable
attenuator section and an amplier that amplies low-level 4 kHz
IF signals (for A and B inputs only). This mode allows the A10
IF section to automatically determine if the attenuator should be
switched in or out. The switch occurs when the A or B input
signal is approximately 030 dBm.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the A10 IF
gain amplier circuits, regardless of the amplitude of the A or B
IF signal. Switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits;
they cannot be switched independently. Be aware that input signal
levels above 030 dBm at the sampler input will saturate the ADC
and cause measurement errors.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the A10
IF gain amplier circuits. Small input signals will appear noisy,
and raise the apparent noise oor of the instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
For factory use only.
IF GAIN AUTO
IF GAIN ON
IF GAIN OFF
SPUR TEST on OFF
(SM7)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Allows you to store the correction constants that reside in
non-volatile memory (EEPROM) onto a disk. Correction constants
improve instrument performance by compensating for specic
operating variations due to hardware limitations (refer to the
\Adjustments" chapter). Having this information on disk is useful
as a backup, in case the constants are lost (due to a CPU board
failure). Without a disk backup the correction constants can be
regenerated manually, although the procedures are more time
consuming.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Osets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator and the A3
cavity oscillator to avoid spurs which cannot otherwise be ltered
out. SPUR AVOID OFF allows examination of these spurs for
service.
STORE EEPR on OFF
SPUR AVOID ON off
(SM8)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANALOG BUS on OFF
(ANAB)
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Enables and disables the analog bus, described below. Use it with
the analog in menu, described in the following pages:
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-15
Analog Bus
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access the analog bus, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON .
Description of the Analog Bus
The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 31 nodes within the instrument.
It can be controlled from the front panel, or through HP-IB, to make voltage and frequency
measurements just like a voltmeter, oscilloscope, or frequency counter. The next few
paragraphs provide general information about the structure and operation of the analog
bus. See \Analog Bus Nodes," below, for a description of each individual node. Refer to the
\Overall Block Diagram," in the \Start Troubleshooting" chapter, to see where the nodes are
located in the instrument.
The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section. The source can be the
following:
any one of the 31 nodes described in \Analog Bus Nodes"
the A14 fractional-N VCO
the A14 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz
The receiver portion can be the following:
the main ADC
the frequency counter
When analog bus traces are displayed, frequency is the x-axis. For a linear x-axis in time,
switch to CW time mode (or sweep a single band).
The Main ADC
The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes voltage measurements in
two ranges. See \ RESOLUTION ," under \Analog In Menu."
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
The Frequency Counter
The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can count one of three sources:
selected analog bus node
A14 fractional-N VCO (FRAC N)
A14 fractional-N VCO divided down to 100 kHz (DIV FRAC N) (frequency range is 100
kHz to 16 MHz)
The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle; one each at pretune, acquire, and track
for each bandswitch. (The service mode, SOURCE PLL, must be ON for the counter to be
updated at each bandswitch.) The counter works in swept modes or in CW mode. It can be
used in conjunction with SERVICE MODES for troubleshooting phase lock and source problems.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To read the counter over HP-IB, use the command OUTPCNTR.
Notes
The display and marker units (U) correspond to volts.
Nodes 17 (1st IF) and 24 (2nd LO) are unreliable above 1 MHz.
About 0.750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no AC signal present.
Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible.
Fast-moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time.
The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms.
Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced.
Analog In Menu
Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes, using the analog bus and internal
counter, as explained below. To switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu,
press:
4SYSTEM5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The RESOLUTION [LOW] key toggles between low and high resolution.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Resolution
Maximum Signal
Minimum Signal
LOW
+0.5 V
HIGH
+10 V
00.5 V
010 V
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-17
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
AUX OUT on OFF
Allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes (except nodes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10,
12) with external equipment (oscilloscope, voltmeter, etc.). To do this,
connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear
panel, and press AUX OUT , until ON is highlighted.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Caution
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
COUNTER: OFF
Note
NNNNNNNN
To prevent damage to the analyzer, rst connect the signal to the rear panel
AUX INPUT, and then switch the function ON.
Switches the internal counter o and removes the counter display from the
display. The counter can be switched on with one of the next three keys.
(Note: Using the counter slows the sweep.) The counter bandwidth is 16
MHz unless otherwise noted for a specic node.
OUTPCNTR is the HP-IB command to output the counter's frequency data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
switches the counter to monitor the analog bus.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional-N VCO frequency
at the node shown on the \Overall Block Diagram," in the \Start
Troubleshooting" chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
switches the counter to monitor the A14 fractional-N VCO frequency after
it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase locking the VCO.
ANALOG BUS
FRAC N
DIV FRAC N
10-18 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Analog Bus Nodes
The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes. The nodes are listed in numerical
order and are grouped by assembly. Refer to the \Overall Block Diagram" for node locations.
A3 Source
To observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes (not node 5 or 8), perform Step A3 to set up
a power sweep on the analog bus. Then follow the node specic instructions.
Step A3.
Press:
4PRESET5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON
4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
4MENU5 CW FREQ 435 4G/n5 SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP
4START5 4-155 4x15
4STOP5 4105 4x15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-19
Node 1
Mn Pwr DAC (main power DAC)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 415 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 1 detects the RF power from the cavity oscillator into the level modulator. Flat line
segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 015 dBm and +10 dBm. A
at line at about 0 V indicates the cavity oscillator is not outputting any power.
Figure NODE1 here.
Figure 10-4. Analog Bus Node 1
10-20 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 2
Src 1V/GHz (source 1 volt per GHz)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 425 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 2 detects the RF power out of the level modulator. Flat line segments indicate ALC
saturation and should not occur between 015 dBm and +10 dBm. In Figure 10-5, the at
part is in the last (right side) division. A at line at about 0 V indicates the cavity oscillator
is not outputting any power.
Figure NODE2 here.
Figure 10-5. Analog Bus Node 2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-21
Node 3
Amp Id (amplier input detector)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 435 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 3 detects the power out of the mixer and into the amplier. Typically the trace is at at
0 V up to about 10 dBm, the response limit of the analog bus detector.
Figure NODE3 here.
Figure 10-6. Analog Bus Node 3
10-22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 4
Det (detects RF OUT power level)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 445 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 4 detects power that is coupled and detected from the RF OUT arm to the ALC loop.
Note that the voltage exponentially follows the power level inversely. Flat segments indicate
ALC saturation and should not occur between 015 dBm and +10 dBm.
Figure NODE4 here.
Figure 10-7. Analog Bus Node 4
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-23
Node 5
Temp (temperature sensor)
This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be known for eective
spur avoidance. The sensitivity is 10 mV per degree Kelvin. The oscillator changes frequency
slightly as its temperature changes. This sensor indicates the temperature so that the
frequency can be predicted.
Node 6
Integ (ALC leveling integrator output)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 465 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 6 displays the output of the summing circuit in the ALC loop. Absolute voltage level
variations are normal. Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between
015 dBm and +10 dBm.
Figure NODE6 here.
Figure 10-8. Analog Bus Node 6
10-24 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 7
Log (log amplier output detector)
Perform step A3, above, to set up a power sweep on the analog bus. Then press 4MEAS5
ANALOG IN 475 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop. The trace should be a linear
ramp. Absolute voltage level variations are normal. Flat segments indicate ALC saturation
and should not occur between 015 dBm and +10 dBm.
The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC loop are
normal and the source is leveled.
Figure NODE7 here.
Figure 10-9. Analog Bus Node 7
Node 8
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
A3 Gnd (ground)
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-25
A10 Digital IF
To observe the A10 analog bus nodes perform step A10, below. Then follow the node-specic
instructions.
Step A10.
Press:
4PRESET5
4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
4MARKER5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON
4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 9
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
+0.37 V (+0.37 V reference)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A10, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN RESOLUTION [HIGH] 495 4x15.
Check for a at line at approximately +0.37V. This is used as the voltage reference in the
\Analog Bus Correction Constants" adjustment procedure. The voltage level should be the
same in high and low resolution; the absolute level is not critical.
Node 10
+2.50 V (+2.50 V reference)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A10, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN RESOLUTION [LOW] 4105 4x15
4SCALE REF5 415 4x15.
Check for a at line at approximately +2.5 V. This voltage is used in the \Analog Bus
Correction Constants" adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low resolution
circuitry.
Node 11
Aux Input (rear panel input)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A10, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 415 415 4x15.
This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage and frequency
measurements. It can be used to look at test points within the instrument, using the
analyzer's display as an oscilloscope. Connect the test point of interest to the rear panel AUX
INPUT BNC connector.
This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available. Also, it can be used for testing
voltage-controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the device under test to the
AUX IN connector. Look at the driving voltage on one display channel, while displaying the
S-parameter response of the test device on the other display channel.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
With AUX OUT switched ON, you can examine the analyzer's analog bus nodes with external
equipment (see AUX OUT on OFF under the \Analog Bus Menu" heading). For HP-IB
considerations, see \HP-IB Service Mnemonic Denitions," located later in this chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 12
A10 Gnd (ground reference)
This node is used in the \Analog Bus Correction Constants" adjustment as a reference for
calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry.
10-26 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
A11 Phase Lock
To observe the A11 analog bus nodes perform step A11, below. Then follow the node-specic
instructions.
Step A11.
Press:
4PRESET5
4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
4MARKER5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON
4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Node 13
VCO Tune 2 (not used)
Node 14
Vbb Ref (ECL reference voltage level)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4145 4x15 4SCALE REF5 4.35 4x15
REFERENCE VALUE 4-1.295 4x15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The trace should be within 0.3 V (one division) of the reference value. Vbb Ref is used to
compensate for ECL voltage drift.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-27
Node 15
Pretune (open-loop source pretune voltage)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4155 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE .
This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair-stepped ramp. Each
step corresponds to the start of a band. Disregard the error message CAUTION: POSSIBLE
FALSE LOCK.
Figure NODE15 here.
Figure 10-10. Analog Bus Node 15
10-28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 16
1V/GHz (source oscillator tuning voltage)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4165 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE .
This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator. You should
see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10-11. If this waveform is correct, you
can be condent that the A11 phase lock assembly, the A3 source assembly, the A13/A14
fractional-N assemblies, and the A7 pulse generator are working correctly and the instrument
is phase locked. If you see anything else, refer to the \Source Troubleshooting" chapter.
Figure NODE16 here.
Figure 10-11. Analog Bus Node 16
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-29
Node 17
1st IF (IF used for phase lock)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4175 4x15 COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
4MENU5 CW FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below.
Entered Frequency Counter Reading
0.3 to 15.999 MHz
16 MHz to 3 GHz
same as entered
1 MHz
This node displays the IF frequency (see node17) as it enters the A11 phase lock assembly via
the A7 ALC assembly. This signal comes from the R sampler output and is used to phase lock
the source.
Figure NODE17 here.
Figure 10-12. Counter Readout Location
10-30 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 18
IF Det 2N (IF on A11 phase lock after 3 MHz lter)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4185 4x15 4STOP5 4205 4M/5
4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This node detects the IF within the low pass lter/limiter. The lter is used during the track
and sweep sequences but never in band 1 (3.3 to 16 MHz). The low level (about 01.7 V)
means IF is in the passband of the lter. This node can be used with the FRAC N TUNE and
SRC TUNE service modes.
Figure NODE18 here.
Figure 10-13. Analog Bus Node 18
Node 19
IF Det 2W (IF after 16 MHz lter)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4195 4x15 4MENU5 4STOP5 4205 4x15
4SCALE REF5 4.25 4x15 REFERENCE VALUE 4-1.25 4x15.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This node detects IF after the 16 MHz lter/limiter. The lter is used during pretune and
acquire, but not in band 1. Normal state is a at line at about 01.7 V.
Node 20
IF Det 1 (IF after 30 MHz lter)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A11, above and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4205 4x15 4SCALE REF5 415 4x15.
The trace should be a at line across the entire frequency band at least 0.5 V greater
than Vbb (node 14). The correct trace indicates the presence of IF after the rst 30 MHz
lter/limiter.
A12 Reference
To observe the A12 analog bus nodes perform step A12, below. Then follow the node-specic
instructions.
Step A12.
Press:
4PRESET5
4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
4MARKER5
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON
4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-31
Node 21
100 kHz (100 kHz reference frequency)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4215 4x15 COUNTER: ANALOG BUS .
This node counts the A12 100 kHz reference signal that is used on A13 (the fractional-N
analog assembly) as a reference frequency for the phase detector.
Node 22
A12 Gnd 1 (ground)
10-32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 23
VCO Tune (A12 VCO tuning voltage)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform Step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4235 4x15 4STOP5 4205 4M/5
4MARKER FCTN5 4SCALE REF5 AUTO SCALE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The trace should show a voltage step as shown in Figure 10-14. If not, refer to the High/Low
Band Transition Adjustment.
Figure NODE23 here.
Figure 10-14. Analog Bus Node 23
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-33
Node 24
2nd LO
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4245 4x15 COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
4MENU5 CW FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler/mixer assemblies to produce the 2nd IF of
4 kHz. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should change to values very close to
those indicated below:
Counter Reading
Frequency Entered
Node 25
0.3 to 1 MHz
frequency entered +4 kHz
1 to 16 MHz
not accurate
16 to 3,000 MHz
996 kHz
PL Ref (phase lock reference)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4255 4x15 COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
4MENU5 CW FREQ .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the A11 phase
lock assembly. As you vary the frequency, the counter reading should change as indicated
below:
Frequency Entered Counter Reading
0.3 to 1 MHz
frequency entered
1 to 16 MHz
not accurate
16 to 3,000 MHz
1 MHz
10-34 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 26
Ext Ref (rear panel external reference input)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4265 4x15.
The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase is being used:
No external reference: about 00.9 V
With external reference: about 00.6 V
Node 27
VCXO Tune (40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A12, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4275 4x15 4MARKER FCTN5
MARKER REFERENCE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This node displays the voltage used to ne tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz. You
should see a at line at some voltage level (the actual voltage level varies from instrument to
instrument). Anything other than a at line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to dierent
frequencies. Refer to the \Frequency Accuracy" adjustment procedure.
Node 28
A12 Gnd 2 (Ground reference)
A14 Fractional-N (Digital)
To observe the A14 analog bus nodes perform step A14, below. Then follow the node-specic
instructions.
Step A14.
Press:
4PRESET5
4MEAS5 ANALOG IN
4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON
4FORMAT5 MORE REAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-35
Node 29
FN VCO Tun (A14 FN VCO tuning voltage)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A14, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4295 4x15 4SCALE REF5 AUTOSCALE .
Observe the A14 FN VCO tuning voltage. If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning
correctly and the VCO is phase locked, the trace should look like Figure 10-15. Any other
waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked. The vertical lines in the trace
indicate the band crossings. (The counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency in
CW mode.)
Figure NODE29 here.
Figure 10-15. Analog Bus Node 29
10-36 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Node 30
FN VCO Det (A14 VCO detector)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A14, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4305 4x15 RESOLUTION [HIGH]
4SCALE REF5 4505 4k/m5.
See whether the FN VCO is oscillating. The trace should resemble Figure 10-16.
Figure NODE30 here.
Figure 10-16. Analog Bus Node 30
Node 31
Count Gate (analog bus counter gate)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform step A14, above, and then press 4MEAS5 ANALOG IN 4315 4x15 4SCALE REF5 425 4x15.
You should see a at line at +5 V. The counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches, and
therefore is not visible on the analog bus. To view the bandswitch activity, look at this node
on an oscilloscope, using AUX OUT ON . Refer to AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus
Menu heading.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEEK/POKE Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To access this menu, press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU PEEK/POKE .
Accesses dierent memory locations to view or change the
contents. The keys are described below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEEK/POKE
Caution
The PEEK/POKE capability is intended for service use only.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PEEK/POKE ADDRESS
(PEEL[D])
Accesses any memory address and shows it in the active entry area
of the display. Use the front panel knob, entry keys, or step keys
to enter the memory address of interest.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Displays the data at the accessed memory address.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Allows you to change the data at the memory address accessed by
the PEEK/POKE ADDRESS softkey. Use the front panel knob, entry
keys, or step keys to change the data. The A9CC jumper must be
in the \ALTER" position in order to poke.
PEEK (PEEK)
POKE (POKE[D])
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-37
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RESET MEMORY
Resets or clears the memory where instrument states are stored.
To do this, press RESET MEMORY 4PRESET5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10-38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Firmware Revision Softkey
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION to display the current rmware revision
information. The number and implementation date appear in the active entry area of the
display as shown in Figure 10-17 below. The installed options are also displayed. Another way
to display the rmware revision information is to cycle the line power.
Figure FIRM here.
Figure 10-17. Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-39
HP-IB Service Mnemonic Definitions
All service routine keystrokes can be made through HP-IB in one of the following approaches:
sending equivalent remote HP-IB commands. (Mnemonics have been documented previously
with the corresponding keystroke.)
invoking the System Menu (MENUSYST) and using the analyzer mnemonic (SOFTn),
where \n" represents the softkey number. (Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to
bottom.)
An HP-IB overview is provided in the \Compatible Peripherals" chapter in the
HP-IB programming information is also provided in the Programming Guide .
User's Guide .
Invoking Tests Remotely
Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts. Since bit 1 of the Event Status
Register B is set (bit 1 = service routine waiting) any time a service routine prompts the user
for an expected response, you can send an appropriate response using one of the following
techniques:
Read event status register B to reset the bit.
Enable bit 1 to interrupt (ESNB[D]). See \Status Reporting" in the Programming Guide.
Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command (see Tests Menu, at the beginning of this
chapter).
Symbol Conventions
[]
An optional operand
D
A numerical operand
<>
A necessary appendage
j
An either/or choice in appendages
Analog Bus Codes
10-40 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
ANAI[D]
Measures and displays the analog input. The preset state input
to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN. The other 30 nodes
may be selected with D only if the ABUS is enabled (ANABon).
OUTPCNTR Outputs the counter's frequency data.
OUTPERRO Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service
routine.
OUTPTESS Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed.
Status codes are those listed under \TST?".
TST?
Executes the power-on self test (internal test 1) and outputs an
integer test status. Status codes are as follows:
0 =pass
1 =fail
2 =in progress
3 =not available
4 =not done
5 =done
NNNNN
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-41
Error Messages
This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing the
analyzer. The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages and
suggestion to help solve the problem.
Note
The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in
the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User's Guide .
BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED
Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile CMOS memory has
failed. The CMOS memory has been cleared. See Chapter 14 for
183
battery replacement instructions. Refer to Chapter 12 of the HP
8753D Network Analyzer User's Guide for more information about
the CMOS memory.
BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK
Error Number The battery protection of the non-volatile CMOS memory is in
danger of failing. If this occurs, all of the instrument state registers
184
stored in CMOS memory will be lost. Save these states to a disk
and see Chapter 14 for battery replacement instructions. Refer to
Chapter 12 of the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User's Guide for
more information about the CMOS memory.
CALIBRATION ABORTED
Error Number You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the
calibration in progress was terminated. Make sure the appropriate
74
channel is active and restart the calibration.
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current
stimulus state or measurement parameter. You will have to perform
63
a new calibration.
10-42 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED
Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful. You must
change the position of the jumper on the A9 CPU assembly. Refer
3
to the \A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure" in the \Adjustments
and Correction Constants" chapter.
CORRECTION TURNED OFF
Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not match
the parameters for the calibration set, therefore correction has been
66
turned o. The critical instrument state parameters are sweep type,
start frequency, frequency span, and number of points.
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement parameter.
Either change the measurement parameters or perform a new
64
calibration.
DEADLOCK
Error Number A fatal rmware error occurred before instrument preset completed.
Call your local Hewlett-Packard sales and service oce.
111
DEVICE: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the
analyzer. Verify that the device is switched on, and check the
119
HP-IB connection between the analyzer and the device. Ensure
that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the
HP-IB address set on the device itself.
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM
Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly. Refer to the disk drive
39
operating manual.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-43
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR
Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren't communicating
properly. Check the HP-IB connection and then try substituting
190
another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument.
DISK: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify power to the
disk drive, and check the HP-IB connection between the analyzer
38
and the disk drive. Ensure that the disk drive address recognized by
the analyzer matches the HP-IB address set on the disk drive itself.
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR
Error Number There may be a problem with your disk. Try a new oppy disk. If a
new oppy disk does not eliminate the error, suspect hardware
189
problems.
EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS
Error Number When modifying calibration kits, you can dene a maximum of
seven standards for any class.
72
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Error Number The disk initialization failed, probably because the disk is damaged.
47
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number Your last front panel or HP-IB request could not be implemented
due to insucient memory space. In some cases, this is a fatal error
51
from which you can escape only by presetting the instrument.
10-44 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
MORE SLIDES NEEDED
Error Number When you use a sliding load (in a user-dened calibration kit), you
71
must set at least three slide positions to complete the calibration.
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
Error Number The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration
69
is already in progress. Start a new calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE
Error Number The store operation will overow the available disk space. Insert a
new disk or purge les to create free disk space.
44
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK
Error Number No les of the type created by an analyzer store operation were
found on the disk. If you requested a specic le title, that le was
45
not found on the disk.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number The rst IF signal was not detected during pretune. Check the
front panel R channel jumper. If there is no visible problem with
5
the jumper, refer to Chapter 7, \Source Troubleshooting."
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number The rst IF signal was detected at pretune, but phase lock could
not be acquired. Refer to Chapter 7, \Source Troubleshooting."
7
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-45
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS
Error Number You cannot store a calibration set due to insucient memory. You
can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an
70
internal register (which may also delete an associated calibration
set, if all the instrument states using the calibration kit have been
deleted). You can store the saved instrument state and calibration
set to a disk before clearing them. After deleting the instrument
states, press 4PRESET5 to run the memory packer.
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL
Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration, the
HP-IB bus is unavailable for other functions such as printing or
198
plotting.
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED
Error Number See error number 57.
58
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED
Error Number See error number 57.
59
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
Error Number You have exceeded approximately +14 dBm at one of the test
ports. The RF output power is automatically reduced to 085 dBm.
57
The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to
indicate that the power trip function has been activated. When this
occurs, reset the power to a lower level, then toggle the
SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO
Error Number You have dened the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in the
165
HP-IB menu. To access the parallel port for general purpose I/O
(GPIO), set the selection to [GPIO].
10-46 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY
Error Number You have dened the parallel port as general purpose I/O (GPIO)
for sequencing. The denition was made under the 4LOCAL5 key
167
menus. To access the parallel port for copy, set the selection to
PARALLEL [COPY] .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed
at power-on, preset, and any time a loss of phase lock is detected.
4
This message indicates that phase lock calibration was initiated and
the rst IF detected, but a problem prevented the calibration from
completing successfully. Refer to Chapter 3 and execute pretune
correction test 48.
This message may appear if you connect a mixer between the RF
output and R input before turning on frequency oset mode. Ignore
it: it will go away when you turn on frequency oset. This message
may also appear if you turn on frequency oset mode before you
dene the oset.
PHASE LOCK LOST
Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost. Refer to Chapter 7, \Source
Troubleshooting."
8
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
Error Number Phase lock has been achieved, but the source may be phase locked
to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer. Perform the source
6
pretune correction routine documented in the \Adjustments and
Correction Constants" chapter.
POWER UNLEVELED
Error Number There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have
attempted to set the power level too high. Check to see if the power
179
level you set is within specications. If it is, refer to Chapter 7,
\Source Troubleshooting." You will only receive this message over
the HP-IB. On the analyzer, P? is displayed.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-47
POW MET INVALID
Error Number The power meter indicates an out-of-range condition. Check the
test setup.
116
POW MET NOT SETTLED
Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent. Verify that the
equipment is set up correctly. If so, preset the instrument and
118
restart the operation.
POW MET: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify that
the power meter address and model number set in the analyzer
117
match the address and model number of the actual power meter.
POWER SUPPLY HOT!
Error Number The temperature sensors on the A8 post-regulator assembly have
detected an over-temperature condition. The power supplies
21
regulated on the post-regulator have been shut down.
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
Error Number One or more supplies on the A8 post-regulator assembly have been
shut down due to an over-current, over-voltage, or under-voltage
22
condition.
PRINTER: error
Error Number The parallel port printer is malfunctioning. The analyzer cannot
175
complete the copy function.
PRINTER: not handshaking
Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding.
177
10-48 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
PRINTER: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number The printer does not respond to control. Verify power to the
printer, and check the HP-IB connection between the analyzer and
24
the printer. Ensure that the printer address recognized by the
analyzer matches the HP-IB address set on the printer itself.
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
Error Number The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP 85024A external probe are
shut down due to excessive current. Troubleshoot the probe, and
23
refer to Chapter 5, \Power Supply Troubleshooting."
SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due to
insucient memory. Increase the available memory by clearing one
151
or more save/recall registers and pressing 4PRESET5, or by storing
les to a disk.
SELF TEST #n FAILED
Service Error Internal test #n has failed. Several internal test routines are
Number 112 executed at instrument preset. The analyzer reports the rst failure
detected. Refer to the internal tests and the self-diagnose feature
descriptions earlier in this chapter.
SLIDES ABORTED (MEMORY REALLOCATION)
Error Number You cannot perform sliding load measurements due to insucient
memory. Reduce memory usage by clearing save/recall registers,
73
then repeat the sliding load measurements.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10-49
SOURCE POWER TRIPPED, RESET UNDER POWER MENU
Information
Message
You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the inputs
and power has been automatically reduced. The annotation P
indicates that power trip has been activated. When this occurs,
reset the power and then press 4MENU5 POWER
SOURCE PWR on OFF , to switch on the power. This message follows
error numbers 57, 58, and 59.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SYSTEM IS NOT IN REMOTE
Error Number The analyzer is in local mode. In this mode, the analyzer will not
respond to HP-IB commands with front panel key equivalents. It
52
will, however, respond to commands that have no such equivalents,
such as status requests.
TEST ABORTED
Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test.
113
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP
Error Number If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode and
you do not also select CW mode, the analyzer is automatically
187
switched to CW.
TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND START OVER
Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress is
Number 115 not correct. Check the setup diagram and instructions in the
\Adjustments and Correction Constants" chapter. Start the
procedure again.
WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK
Error Number You have attempted to store, load, or read le titles, but your disk
77
format does not conform to the Logical Interchange Format (LIF).
You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it.
10-50 Service Key Menus and Error Messages
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Contents
11. Error Terms
Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose
Full Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure . . . .
Error Term Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values
Uncorrected Performance . . . . . . . . . .
Error Term Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directivity (EDF and EDR) . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Match (ESF and ESR) . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Reection Tracking (ERF and ERR) . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXR) . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Load Match (ELF and ELR) . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR) . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signicant System Components . . . . . . .
Aected Measurements . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-1
11-2
11-6
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-8
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-10
11-10
11-10
11-10
11-11
11-11
11-11
11-11
11-12
11-12
11-12
11-12
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Contents-1
Figures
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
11-7.
Standard Connections for Full Two-Port Error-Correction . . . . .
Typical EDF/EDR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical ESF/ESR without and with Cables . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical ERF/ERR Without and With Cables . . . . . . . . . .
Typical EXF/EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz Bandwidth
Typical ELF/ELR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical ETF/ETR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-3
11-8
11-9
11-10
11-11
11-12
11-13
11-1. Calibration Coecient Terms and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2. Uncorrected System Performance of HP 8753D (50
) with 7 mm Test Ports
11-5
11-7
Tables
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
11
Error Terms
The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a measurement
error-correction (measurement calibration) is performed. These factors are known by the
following terms:
error terms
E-terms
measurement calibration coecients
The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well-dened calibration devices over the
frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the
devices. The dierences represent systematic (repeatable) errors of the analyzer system. The
resulting calibration coecients are good representations of the systematic error sources.
for details on the various levels of error-correction, refer to the \Optimizing Measurement
Results" chapter of the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User's Guide . Fore details on
the theory of error-correction, refer to the \Application and Operation Concepts" chapter of
the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User's Guide .
Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose
Specic parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the magnitude and
shape of the error terms. Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error
terms look like, we can examine error terms to monitor system performance (preventive
maintenance) or to identify faulty components in the system (troubleshooting).
Preventive Maintenance. A stable, repeatable system should generate repeatable error
terms over long time intervals, for example, six months. If you make a hardcopy record
(print or plot) of the error terms, you can periodically compare current error terms
with the record. A sudden shift in error terms reects a sudden shift in systematic
errors, and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting. A long-term trend often
reects drift, connector and cable wear, or gradual degradation, indicating the need for
further investigation and preventive maintenance. Yet, the system may still conform to
specications. The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors or inspecting
cables.
Troubleshooting. If a subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected, the
magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with
the same instrument and calibration kit. This comparison will produce the most precise
view of the problem.
However, if previously generated values are not available, compare the current values to the
typical values listed in Table 11-2, and shown graphically on the plots in this chapter. If the
magnitude exceeds its limit, inspect the corresponding system component. If the condition
causes system verication to fail, replace the component.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-1
Consider the following while troubleshooting:
1. All parts of the system, including cables and calibration devices, can contribute to
systematic errors and impact the error terms.
2. Connectors must be clean, gaged, and within specication for error term analysis to be
meaningful.
3. Avoid unnecessary bending and exing of the cables following measurement calibration,
minimizing cable instability errors.
4. Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration. The connector
interface must be repeatable. Refer to the \Principles of Microwave Connector Care"
section in the \Service Equipment and Analyzer Options" chapter for information on
connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors.
5. Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor, subtle performance problems. Refer to the
\Start Troubleshooting Here" chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is
evident.
6. It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice (using two distinct measurement
calibrations) to establish the degree of repeatability. If the results do not seem
repeatable, check all connectors and cables.
Full Two-Port Error-Correction Procedure
Note
This is the most accurate error-correction procedure. Since the analyzer takes
both forward and reverse sweeps, this procedure takes more time than the
other correction procedures.
1. Set any measurement parameters that you want for the device measurement: power,
format, number of points, IF bandwidth.
2. To access the measurement correction menus, press:
4CAL5
3. Assuming that your calibration kit is the m default, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CAL KIT 7 MM RETURN
4. To select the correction type, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2-PORT REFLECTION
5. Connect a shielded open circuit to PORT 1.
11-2 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure FULLCAL here.
Figure 11-1. Standard Connections for Full Two-Port Error-Correction
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-3
6. To measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORWARD: OPEN
The analyzer underlines the OPEN softkey after it measures the standard.
7. Disconnect the open, and connect a short circuit to PORT 1.
8. To measure the device, when the displayed trace has settled, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORWARD: SHORT
The analyzer underlines the SHORT softkey after it measures the standard.
9. Disconnect the short, and connect an impedance-matched load to PORT 1.
10. To measure the standard, when the displayed trace has settled, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORWARD: LOAD
The analyzer underlines the LOAD softkey after it measures the standard.
11. Repeat the open-short-load measurements descried above, but connect the devices in
turn to PORT 2, and use the REVERSE: OPEN , REVERSE: SHORT , and REVERSE: LOAD
softkeys.
12. To compute the reection correction coecients, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
STANDARDS DONE
13. To start the transmission portion of the correction, press: TRANSMISSION
14. Press ISOLATION and select from the following two options:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range less than 90 dB, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
OMIT ISOLATION
If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range greater than 90 dB, follow these
steps:
a. Connect impedance-matched loads to PORT 1 and PORT 2.
Note
If you will be measuring highly reective devices, such as lters, use the test
device, connected to the reference plane and terminated with a load, for the
isolation standard.
b. Activate at least four times more averages than desired during the device
measurement.
c. Press 4CAL5 RESUME CAL SEQUENCE ISOLATION FWD ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
REV ISOL'N ISOL'N STD ISOLATION DONE .
d. Return the averaging to the original state of the measurement, and press 4CAL5
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE .
15. Make a \thru" connection between PORT 1 and PORT 2, as shown in Figure 11-1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-4 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
16. To measure the standard, when the trace has settled, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TRANSMISSION
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DO BOTH FWD + REV
17. To compute the error coecients, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DONE 2-PORT CAL
The analyzer displays the corrected measurement trace. The analyzer also shows the
notation Cor at the left of the screen, indicating that error-correction is on.
Note
You can save or store the measurement correction to use for later
measurements. Use the menus under 4SAVE/RECALL5, or refer to \Printing,
Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results" located in the HP 8753D Option
011 Network Analyzer User's Guide for procedures.
18. This completes the full two-port correction procedure. You can connect and measure your
device under test.
Calibration
Coecient
Table 11-1. Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests
Calibration Type
Response
Response
1-port
2-port
and Isolation*
EX (ED )
ED
EDF
32
ET (ER )
ES
ESF
33
ER
ERF
34
4
EXF
35
5
ELF
36
6
ETF
37
7
EDR
38
8
ESR
39
9
ERR
40
10
EXR
41
11
ELR
42
12
ETR
43
1
2
ER or ET
Test
Number
3
NOTES:
Meaning of rst subscript: D=directivity; S=source match; R=reection tracking; X=crosstalk; L=load match;
T=transmission tracking.
Meaning of second subscript: F=forward; R=reverse.
* Response and Isolation cal yields: EX or ET if a transmission parameter (S21 , S12 ) or ED or ER if a reection
parameter (S11 , S22 )
One-path, 2-port cal duplicates arrays 1 to 6 in arrays 7 to 12.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-5
Error Term Inspection
Note
If the correction is not active, press 4CAL5
CORRECTION ON .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4SYSTEM5 SERVICE MENU TESTS 4325 4x15 EXECUTE TEST .
The analyzer copies the rst calibration measurement trace for the selected error term into
memory and then displays it. Table 11-2 lists the test numbers.
2. Press 4SCALE REF5 and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term trace.
3. Press 4MARKER FCTN5 and use the marker functions to determine the error term magnitude.
4. Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in the following \Error
Term descriptions" section, and to previously measured data. If data is not available from
previous measurements, refer to the typical uncorrected performance specications listed in
Table 11-2.
5. Make a hardcopy of the measurement results:
a. Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer.
b. Press 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES and select the appropriate
peripheral to verify that the HP-IB address is set correctly on the analyzer.
c. Press 4SAVE/RECALL5 and then choose either PRINT MONOCHROME or PLOT .
d. Press 4DISPLAY5 MORE TITLE and title each data trace so that you can identify it later.
For detailed information on creating hardcopies, refer to \Printing, Plotting, and Saving
Measurement Results" in the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User's Guide .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values
1. Perform a system verication to verify that the system still conforms to specications.
2. If system verication fails, refer to \Start Troubleshooting Here."
Uncorrected Performance
The following table shows typical performance without error-correction. RF cables are not
used except as noted. Related error terms should be within these values.
11-6 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Table 11-2.
Uncorrected System Performance of HP 8753D (50
)
with 7 mm Test Ports
Frequency Range
30 kHz to 300 kHz*
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
3 GHz to 6 GHz
Directivity
20 dB
35 dB
30 dB
25 dB
Source Match
18 dB
16 dB
16 dB
14 dB
Load Match
20 dB
18 dB
16 dB
14 dB
Transmission Tracking
62.0 dB
62.0 dB
61.5 dB
61.5 dB
61.5 dB
61.5 dB
62.5 dB
62.5 dB
Crosstalk
100 dB
100 dB
100 dB
90 dB
Reection Tracking
* Typical
15 dB, 30 kHz to 50 kHz
10 dB, 30 kHz to 50 kHz
Error Term Descriptions
The error term descriptions in this section include the following information:
signicance of each error term
typical results following a full 2-port error-correction
guidelines to interpret each error term
The same description applies to both the forward (F) and reverse (R) terms.
Directivity (EDF and EDR)
Description
Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reected when a load is attached to the
test port. These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the system.
The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the reection (S11, S22) of
the load during the error-correction procedure.
Significant System Components
load used in the error-correction (calibration)
test port connectors
test port cables
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-7
Affected Measurements
Low reection device measurements are most aected by directivity errors.
Figure EDFEDR here.
Figure 11-2. Typical EDF/EDR without and with Cables
Source Match (ESF and ESR)
Description
Source match is a measure of test port connector match, as well as the match between all
components from the source to the test port. These are the forward and reverse uncorrected
source match terms of the driven port.
Significant System Components
load calibration kit device
open calibration kit device
short calibration kit device
bridge
test port connectors
bias tees
step attenuator
transfer switch
test port cables
Affected Measurements
Reection and transmission measurements of highly reective devices are most aected by
source match errors.
11-8 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure ESFESR here.
Figure 11-3. Typical ESF/ESR without and with Cables
Reflection Tracking (ERF and ERR)
Description
Reection tracking is the dierence between the frequency response of the reference path (R
path) and the frequency response of the reection test path (A or B input path).
Significant System Components
open calibration kit device
short calibration kit device
R signal path if large variation in both ERF and ERR
A or B input paths if only one term is aected
Affected Measurements
All reection measurements (high or low return loss) are aected by the reection tracking
errors.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-9
Figure ERFERR here.
Figure 11-4. Typical ERF/ERR Without and With Cables
Isolation (Crosstalk, EXF and EXR)
Description
Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal paths. The
isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission (S21, S12) with loads
attached to both ports during the error-correction procedure. Since these terms are low
in magnitude, they are usually noisy (not very repeatable). The error term magnitude
changes dramatically with IF bandwidth: a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to
lower the noise oor beyond the crosstalk specication. Using averaging will also reduce the
peak-to-peak noise in this error term.
Significant System Components
sampler crosstalk
Affected Measurements
Transmission measurements, (primarily where the measured signal level is very low), are
aected by isolation errors. For example, transmission measurements where the insertion loss
of the device under test is large.
11-10 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure EXFEXR here.
Figure 11-5. Typical EXF/EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz Bandwidth
Load Match (ELF and ELR)
Description
Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the output
of a 2-port device. Load match error terms are characterized by measuring the reection (S11,
S22) responses of a \thru" conguration during the calibration procedure.
Significant System Components
\thru" cable
cable connectors
test port connectors
Affected Measurements
All transmission and reection measurements of a low insertion loss two-port devices are most
aected by load match errors. Transmission measurements of lossy devices are also aected.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-11
Figure ELFELR here.
Figure 11-6. Typical ELF/ELR
Transmission Tracking (ETF and ETR)
Description
Transmission tracking is the dierence between the frequency response of the reference
path (including R input) and the transmission test path (including A or B input) while
measuring transmission. The response of the test port cables is included. These terms are
characterized by measuring the transmission (S21, S12) of the \thru" conguration during the
error-correction procedure.
Significant System Components
R signal path (if both ETF and ETR and bad)
A or B input paths
\thru" cable
Affected Measurements
All transmission measurements are aected by transmission tracking errors.
11-12 Error Terms
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure ETFETR here.
Figure 11-7. Typical ETF/ETR
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Error Terms 11-13
Contents
12. Theory of Operation
How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works . . . . . . . . .
The Built-In Synthesized Source . . . . . . . . . .
Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Receiver Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
A Close Look at the Analyzer's Functional Groups . . .
Power Supply Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preregulated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulated +5 V Digital Supply . . . . . . . . . .
Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED
A8 Post Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs . . . . . . .
Shutdown Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector . . . .
Display Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Probe Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 Front Panel Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Signal Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A18 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A19 GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A16 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Theory Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A14/A13 Fractional-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A12 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A7 Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A11 Phase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Super Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Source Low Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source High Band Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Operation in other Modes/Features . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-1
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-4
12-4
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-5
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-6
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-7
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-8
12-9
12-9
12-10
12-10
12-10
12-10
12-10
12-11
12-11
12-13
12-15
Contents-1
Frequency Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Harmonic Analysis (Option 002) . . . . . . . . . .
External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4/A5/A6 Sampler/Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Sampler Circuit in High Band . . . . . . . .
The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band
The 2nd LO Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mixer Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A10 Digital IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-15
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
12-18
12-19
12-20
12-20
12-20
12-21
12-21
12-21
Index
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figures
12-1.
12-2.
12-3.
12-4.
12-5.
12-6.
12-7.
12-8.
12-9.
12-10.
Simplied Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System .
Power Supply Functional Group, Simplied Block Diagram .
Digital Control Group, Simplied Block Diagram . . . . .
Low Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . .
High Band Operation of the Source . . . . . . . . . . .
Harmonic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Source Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuned Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplied Block Diagrams of the Test Sets . . . . . . . .
Receiver Functional Group, Simplied Block Diagram . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-2
12-4
12-7
12-12
12-14
12-16
12-17
12-17
12-19
12-20
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-11
12-12
12-15
12-21
Tables
12-1.
12-2.
12-3.
12-4.
Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies
Low Band Subsweep Frequencies . . .
High Band Subsweep Frequencies . . .
Mixer Frequencies . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents-3
12
Theory of Operation
This chapter is divided into two major sections:
\How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works" gives a general description of the HP 8753D
Network Analyzer's operation.
\A Close Look at the Analyzer's Functional Groups" provides more detailed operating
theory for each of the analyzer's functional groups.
How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works
Network analyzers measure the reection and transmission characteristics of devices and
networks. A network analyzer test system consists of the following:
source
signal-separation devices
receiver
display
The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under test, or
reected from its input, and then compares it with the incident signal generated by the swept
RF source. The signals are then applied to a receiver for measurement, signal processing, and
display.
The HP 8753D Option 011 vector network analyzer integrates a high resolution synthesized
RF source and a dual channel three-input receiver to measure and display magnitude, phase,
and group delay of transmitted and reected power. The HP 8753D Option 010 has the
additional capability of transforming measured data from the frequency domain to the time
domain. Figure 12-1 is a simplied block diagram of the network analyzer system. A detailed
block diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting
Here."
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-1
Figure SIMBLK12 here.
Figure 12-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System
The Built-In Synthesized Source
The analyzer's built-in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the range of 300 kHz
to 3.0 GHz. The HP 8753D Option 006 is able to generate signals from 30 kHz to 6 GHz.
The RF output power is leveled by an internal ALC (automatic leveling control) circuit. To
achieve frequency accuracy and phase measuring capability, the analyzer is phase locked to a
highly stable crystal oscillator.
For this purpose, a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R channel input of the
receiver, where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed back to the source.
Test Sets
Signal separation for the HP 8753D Option 011 network analyzer can be accomplished using
any one of the following accessories:
HP 85044A/B Transmission/Reection Test Set
HP 85046A/B S-Parameter Test Set
HP 85047A S-Parameter Test Set
HP Made Special Option Transmission/Reection or S-Parameter Test Set
HP 86205A/86207A RF Bridge
HP 11667A Two-Way Power Splitter and HP 86205A RF Bridge
Signal separation devices are needed to separate the incident signal from the
transmitted/reected signal. The incident signal, which comes from the analyzer's source RF
output, is applied to the R channel receiver input. Meanwhile, the transmitted/reected signal
is applied to the A or B channel receiver input via a test port coupler (in a test set) or an RF
bridge.
12-2 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
The HP 85046A/B and HP 85047A S-parameter test sets contain the hardware required to
make simultaneous transmission and reection measurements in both the forward and reverse
directions. An RF path switch in the test set allows reverse measurements to be made without
changing the connections to the device under test.
Test Set Step Attenuator
The 70 dB step attenuator contained in the test set is used to adjust the power level to the
DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path. The attenuator
in the HP 85046A/B or HP 85047A test set is controlled from the front panel of the analyzer
using the ATTENUATOR PORT 1 or ATTENUATOR PORT 2 softkeys located in the power menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The Receiver Block
The receiver block contains three sampler/mixers for the R, A, and B inputs. The signals are
sampled, and down-converted to produce a 4 kHz IF (intermediate frequency). A multiplexer
sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to the ADC (analog to digital converter)
where it is converted from an analog to a digital signal to be measured and processed for
viewing on the display. Both amplitude and phase information are measured simultaneously,
regardless of what is displayed on the analyzer.
The Microprocessor
A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error correction, trace
math, formatting, scaling, averaging, and marker operations, according to the instructions
from the front panel or over HP-IB. The formatted data is then displayed.
Required Peripheral Equipment
In addition to the analyzer and the test set, a system requires calibration standards for vector
accuracy enhancement, and cables for interconnections.
A Close Look at the Analyzer's Functional Groups
The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in ve functional groups. Each group
consists of several major assemblies, and performs a distinct function in the instrument. Some
assemblies are related to more than one group, and in fact all the groups are to some extent
interrelated and aect each other's performance.
Power Supply. The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post regulator and the
A15 preregulator. It supplies power to the other assemblies in the instrument.
Digital Control. The digital control group consists of the A1 front panel and A2 front
panel processor, the A9 CPU, the A16 rear panel, the A18 display and the A19 graphics
system processor (GSP). The A10 digital IF assembly is also related to this group. These
assemblies combine to provide digital control for the analyzer and an HP 85047A or
85046A/B S-parameter test set if used.
Source. The source group consists of the A3 source, A7 pulse generator, A11 phase lock,
A12 reference, A13 fractional-N (analog), and A14 fractional-N (digital) assemblies. The A4
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-3
sampler is also related since it is part of the source phase lock loop. The source supplies a
phase-locked RF signal to the device under test.
Signal Separation. The signal separation group divides the source signal into a reference
path and a test path, and provides connections to the device under test. To accomplish
this, one of several external test sets must be connected to the analyzer.
Receiver. The receiver group consists of the A4/A5/A6 sampler/mixers and the A10 digital
IF. The A12 reference assembly and the A9 CPU are also related. The receiver measures
and processes input signals for display.
The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups.
Power Supply Theory
The power supply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the A8 post
regulator. These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides regulated
DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer. The A15 preregulator is enclosed in
a casting at the rear of the instrument behind the display. It is connected to the A8 post
regulator by a wire bus A15W1. Figure 12-2 is a simplied block diagram of the power supply
group.
Figure PSBLK12 here.
Figure 12-2. Power Supply Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram
A15 Preregulator
The A15 preregulator steps down and recties the line voltage. It provides a fully regulated
+5 V digital supply, and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post regulator
assembly for additional regulation.
The A15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module, a 60 kHz switching
preregulator, and overvoltage protection for the +5 V digital supply. It provides LEDs, visible
from the rear of the instrument, to indicate either normal or shutdown status.
12-4 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Line Power Module
The line power module includes the line power switch, voltage selector switch, and main fuse.
The line power switch is activated from the front panel. The voltage selector switch, accessible
at the rear panel, adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V
(with 350 VA maximum). The main fuse, which protects the input side of the preregulator
against drawing too much line current, is also accessible at the rear panel. Refer to the HP
8753D Network Analyzer Installation and Quick Start Guide for line voltage tolerances and
other power considerations.
Preregulated Voltages
The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages. The regulated +5
V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard. The following partially regulated voltages
are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for nal regulation:
+70 V +25 V +18 V 018 V +8 V 08 V
Regulated +5 V Digital Supply
The +5VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator. It goes
directly to the motherboard, and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital
supply. A +5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the A15 preregulator. The
+5VCPU is derived from the +5VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the A19
graphics system processor.
In order for the preregulator to function, the +5 V digital supply must be loaded by one or
more assemblies, and the +5 V sense line must be working. If not, the other preregulated
voltages will not be correct.
Shutdown Indications: the Green LED and Red LED
The green LED is on in normal operation. It is o when line power is not connected, not
switched on, or set too low, or if the line fuse has blown.
The red LED, which is o in normal operation, lights to indicate a fault in the +5 V supply.
This may be an over/under line voltage, over line current, or overtemperature condition. Refer
to the troubleshooting chapters for more information.
A8 Post Regulator
The A8 post regulator lters and regulates the DC voltages received from the A15
preregulator. It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies. It
distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument. It
includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit, the variable fan speed circuit, and the air ow
detector. Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies.
Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5, \Power Supply
Troubleshooting," to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator.
Voltage Indications: the Green LEDs
The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal operation, to
indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply. If they are o or ashing, a problem is
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-5
indicated. The troubleshooting procedures later in this chapter detail the steps to trace the
cause of the problem.
Shutdown Circuit
The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or
overtemperature. It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be
shut down. It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger warning messages on the
analyzer display. The voltages that are not shut down are the +5VD and +5VCPU digital
supplies from the preregulator, the fan supplies, the probe power supplies, and the display
supplies. The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by
using a jumper to connect the SDIS line (A8TP4) to ground.
Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector
The fan power is derived directly from the +18 V and 018 V supplies from the A15
preregulator. The fan is not fused, so that it will continue to provide airow and cooling when
the instrument is otherwise disabled. If overheating occurs, the main instrument supplies are
shut down and the fan runs at full speed. An overtemperature status message is sent to the
A9 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer display. The fan also runs at full speed
if the air ow detector senses a low output of air from the fan. (Full speed is normal at initial
power on.)
Display Power
The A8 assembly supplies voltages to the display through a wire cable. The A8 supplies
+5VCPU and +65 V to the A19 GSP, then the +65 V is routed to the display. They are not
connected to the protective shutdown circuitry so that the A18 display assemblies can operate
during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work.
Probe Power
The +18 V and 018 V supplies are post regulated to +15 V and 012.6 V to provide a power
source at the front panel for an external RF probe or milli-meter modules.
Digital Control Theory
The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies:
A1 front panel
A2 front panel processor
A9 CPU
A10 digital IF
A16 rear panel
A18 display
A19 GSP
These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer and HP 85047A
and 85046A/B S-parameter test set. They provide math processing functions, as well
12-6 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
as communications between the analyzer and an external controller and/or peripherals.
Figure 12-3 is a simplied block diagram of the digital control functional group.
Figure DIBLK12 here.
Figure 12-3. Digital Control Group, Simplified Block Diagram
A1 Front Panel
The A1 front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer. It includes the
keyboard for local user inputs, and the front panel LEDs that indicate instrument status. The
RPG (rotary pulse generator) is not electrically connected to the front panel, but provides
user inputs directly to the front panel processor.
A2 Front Panel Processor
The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel and the
RPG, and transmits them to the CPU. It has the capability to interrupt the CPU to provide
information updates. It controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information to the
user.
A9 CPU/A10 Digital IF
The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU (central processing unit), the digital signal
processor, memory storage, and interconnect port interfaces. The main CPU is the master
controller for the analyzer, including the other dedicated microprocessors. The memory
includes EEPROM, RAM, EPROM, and ROM.
Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from the A10 digital IF.
The data taking sequence is triggered either from the A14 fractional-N assembly, externally
from the rear panel, or by software on the A9 assembly.
Main CPU
The main CPU is a 16-bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire
instrument through the instrument bus. The main CPU receives external control information
from the front panel or HP-IB, and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-7
data in the main RAM. It controls the digital signal processor, the front panel processor, the
display processor, and the interconnect port interfaces. In addition, when the analyzer is in
the system controller mode, the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral
port interfaces.
The main CPU has a dedicated EPROM that contains the operating system for instrument
control. Front panel settings are stored in CMOS RAM, with a battery providing at least 5
years of backup storage when external power is o.
Main RAM
The main RAM (random access memory) is shared memory for the CPU and the digital signal
processor. It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor, while additional
calculations are performed on it by the CPU. The CPU reads the resulting formatted data
from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands. It writes these commands to the
GSP for output to the analyzer display.
EEPROM
EEPROM (electrically-erasable programmable read only memory) contains factory set
correction constants unique to each instrument. These constants correct for hardware
variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy. The correction constants can be
updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction Constants."
Digital Signal Processor
The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital IF. It computes
discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the 4 kHz
IF signal. The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM.
A18 Display
The A18 display is a 7.5 inch raster scan CRT with associated drive circuitry. It receives a
+65 V power supply from the A19 GSP, along with digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync
signals, and red, green, and blue (RGB) video signals. Automatic degaussing is performed
whenever the instrument is switched on to minimize the magnetization of the CRT.
A19 GSP
The A19 graphics system processor provides an interface between the A9 CPU and the A18
display. The CPU (A9) converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the
GSP. The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals
to the A18 display. It also produces RGB output signals which are sent to the A16 rear panel.
The assembly receives two power supply voltages: +5VCPU, which is used for processing, and
+65 V, which is passed on to A18 but not used on A19.
12-8 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
A16 Rear Panel
The A16 rear panel includes the following interfaces:
TEST SET I/O INTERCONNECT. This allows you to connect an HP 8753D Option 011
analyzer to an HP 85046A/B or 85047A S-parameter test set using the interconnect cable
supplied with the test set. The S-parameter test set is then fully controlled by the analyzer.
This interface also provides control signals and power to operate duplexer test adapters.
EXT REF. This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the
analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a signal is
connected to this input. When the signal is removed, the analyzer automatically switches
back to its internal frequency reference.
10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE. (Option 1D5) This output is connected to the EXT
REF (described above) to improve the frequency accuracy of the analyzer.
AUX INPUT. This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal source, such
as a detector or function generator, which you can then measure, using the S-parameter
menu. (You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines.)
EXT AM. This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the ALC
circuitry of the analyzer's source. This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF
output signal.
EXT TRIG. This allows connection of an external negative TTL-compatible signal that will
trigger a measurement sweep. The trigger can be set to external through softkey functions.
TEST SEQ. This outputs a TTL signal that can be programmed in a test sequence to
be high or low, or pulse (10 seconds) high or low at the end of a sweep for a robotic part
handler interface.
LIMIT TEST. This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results as follows:
Pass: TTL high
Fail: TTL low
Source Theory Overview
The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase locking a YIG
oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO (voltage controlled oscillator). The source
output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz and 3 GHz (or 30 kHz and 6 GHz for
Option 006). The source has a maximum leveled power of +20 dBm (or +18 dBm for Option
006) and a minimum power of 05 dBm.
The full frequency range of the source is produced in 14 subsweeps, one in super low band,
two in low band and eleven in high band. The high band frequencies (16 MHz to 3 GHz)
or (16 MHz to 6 GHz for Option 006) are achieved by harmonic mixing, with a dierent
harmonic number for each subsweep. The low band frequencies (300 kHz to 16 MHz) are
down-converted by fundamental mixing. The super low band frequencies (10 kHz to 300 kHz)
are sent directly from the A12 reference board to the output of the A3 source assembly. This
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-9
band is not phased locked nor does it use the ALC. It is the basic amplied output of the
fractional-N synthesizer.
The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described below.
A14/A13 Fractional-N
These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer. The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in the A14 assembly
generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and harmonic mixing.
A12 Reference
This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by dividing
down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator. In low band operation, the output of the
fractional-N synthesizer is mixed down in the A12 reference assembly. (The 2nd LO signal
from the A12 assembly is explained in Receiver Theory.) The A12 is also the origin of the
super low band portion of the 8753D source.
A7 Pulse Generator
A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic multiples of the
VCO output. These harmonics provide the high band LO (local oscillator) input to the
samplers. In low band and super low band the operation the pulse generator is turned o.
A11 Phase Lock
This assembly compares the rst IF (derived from the source output in the A4 sampler) to a
stable reference, and generates an error voltage that is integrated into the drive for the A3
source assembly.
A3 Source
This assembly includes a 3.0 to 6.8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3.8 GHz cavity oscillator. The
outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output signal. In Option 006 (30
kHz to 6 GHz) the frequencies 3.0 to 6.0 GHz are no longer a mixed product, but are the
direct output of the YIG Oscillator. The signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer.
The ALC (automatic leveling control) circuitry is also in the A3 assembly.
12-10 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Source Super Low Band Operation
The Super Low Band Frequency Range is 10 kHz to 300 kHz. These frequencies are generated
by the A12 Reference Board. They are the amplied output of the fractional-N synthesizer.
This output is not phase locked and is not subject to ALC control. Refer to Table 12-1.
Table 12-1. Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N (MHz) 1st IF (MHz) RF Output (MHz)
40.0 to 43.3
0.010 to 0.300
0.010 to 0.300
Source Low Band Operation
The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz. These frequencies are generated by
locking the A3 source to a reference signal. The reference signal is synthesized by mixing
down the fundamental output of the fractional-N VCO with a 40 MHz crystal reference signal.
Low band operation diers from high band in these respects: The reference frequency for the
A11 phase lock is not a xed 1 MHz signal, but varies with the frequency of the fractional-N
VCO signal. The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal through to the mixer. The
1st IF signal from the A4 sampler is not xed but is identical to the RF output signal from
the A3 source and sweeps with it. The following steps outline the low band sweep sequence,
illustrated in Figure 12-4.
1. A signal (FN LO) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the A14
Fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 4O MHz greater than the
start frequency. The signal is divided down to 1OO kHz and phase locked in the A13
assembly, as in high band operation.
2. The fractional-N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHz to produce a reference signal. The
signal (FN LO) from the Fractional-N VCO goes to the A12 reference assembly, where it is
mixed with the 4O MHz VCXO (voltage controlled crystal oscillator). The resulting signal
is the reference to the phase comparator in the A11 assembly.
3. The A3 source is pretuned. The signal (RF OUT) is fed to the A4 sampler. The pretuned
DAC in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a frequency 1 to 6 MHz
above the start frequency. This signal (RF OUT) goes to the A4 R input sampler/mixer
assembly. (The source RF output must be connected externally to the R input connector
in the Option 011.)
4. The signal from the source is fed back (1st IF) to the phase comparator. The source RF
OUT signal passes directly through the sampler in the A4 assembly, because the sampler
is biased on. The signal (1st IF) is fed back unaltered to the phase comparator in the A11
phase lock assembly. The other input to the phase comparator is the heterodyned reference
signal from the A12 assembly. Any frequency dierence between these two signals produces
a proportional error voltage.
5. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. The error
voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the YIG closer to the
reference frequency. The loop process continues until the source frequency and the
reference frequency are the same, and phase lock is achieved.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-11
6.
When lock is
achieved at the start frequency, the synthesizer starts to sweep. This changes the phase
lock reference frequency, and causes the source to track at a dierence frequency 40 MHz
below the synthesizer.
A synthesized sub sweep is generated. The source tracks the synthesizer.
Figure LBBLK12 here.
Figure 12-4. Low Band Operation of the Source
The full low band is produced in two sub sweeps, to allow addition IF ltering below 3 MHz .
At the transition between subsweeps, the source is pretuned and then relocks. Table 12-2 lists
the low band subsweep frequencies at the fractional-N VCO and the RF output.
Table 12-2. Low Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N (MHz) 1st IF (MHz) RF Output (MHz)
40.3 to 43.3
0.3 to 3.3
0.3 to 3.3
43.3 to 56.0
3.3 to 16.0
3.3 to 16.0
12-12 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Source High Band Operation
The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 3.O GHz or 16 MHz to 6.0 GHz with Option
006. These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase-locking the A3 source signal to
harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The high band subsweep sequence, illustrated in
Figure 12-5, follows these steps:
1. A signal (HI OUT) is generated by the fractional-N VCO. The VCO in the A14
fractional-N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range of 30 to 60 MHz. This
signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz reference signal from the A12 reference
assembly. The signal from the fractional-N VCO is divided by 1 or 2, and goes to the pulse
generator.
2. A comb of harmonics (1st LO) is produced in the A7 pulse generator. The divided down
signal from the fractional-N VCO drives a step recovery diode (SRD) in the A7 pulse
generator assembly. The SRD multiplies the fundamental signal from the fractional-N into
a comb of harmonic frequencies. The harmonics are used as the 1st LO (local oscillator)
signal to the samplers. One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start signal set
from the front panel.
3. The A3 source is pretuned. The source RF OUT is fed to the A4 sampler. The pretune
DAC in the A11 phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a rst approximation frequency
(1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency). This signal (RF OUT) goes to the A4 R
input sampler/mixer assembly.
4. The synthesizer signal and the source signal are combined by the sampler. A dierence
frequency is generated. In the A4 sampler, the 1st LO signal from the pulse generator
is combined with the RF OUT signal. The IF (intermediate frequency) produced is a
rst approximation of 1 MHz. This signal (1st IF) is routed back to the A11 phase lock
assembly.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-13
5.
The 1st
IF feedback signal from the A4 is ltered and applied to a phase comparator circuit in the
A11 phase lock assembly. The other input to the phase comparator is a crystal controlled 1
MHz signal from the A12 reference assembly. Any frequency dierence between these two
signals produces a proportional error voltage.
6. A tuning signal (YO DRIVE) tunes the source and phase lock is achieved. The error
voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator, in order to bring it closer to the
required frequency. The loop process continues until the 1st IF feedback signal to the phase
comparator is equal to the 1 MHz reference signal, and phase lock is achieved.
7. A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13/A14. The A3 source tracks the synthesizer.
When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency, the synthesizer
starts to sweep. The phase locked loop forces the source to track the synthesizer,
maintaining a constant 1 MHz 1st IF signal .
The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps, by phase locking the A3
source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional-N VCO. The 16 to 31 MHz subsweep
is produced by a one half harmonic, using the divide-by-2 circuit on the A14 assembly. At
the transitions between subsweeps, the source is pretuned and then relocks. Table 12-3 lists
the high band subsweep frequencies from the fractional-N VCO and the RF output.
The dierence frequency (1st IF) from the A4 sampler is compared to a reference.
Figure HBBLK12 here.
Figure 12-5. High Band Operation of the Source
12-14 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Table 12-3. High Band Subsweep Frequencies
Fractional-N (MHz) Harmonic RF Output (MHz)
30 to 60
1/2
16 to 31
30 to 60
1
31 to 61
30 to 60
2
61 to 121
40 to 59
3
121 to 178
35.4 to 59.2
5
178 to 296
32.8 to 59.4
9
296 to 536
35.7 to 59.5
15
536 to 893
33.0 to 59.5
27
893 to 1607
31.5 to 58.8
51
1607 to 3000
Option 006
37.0 to 59.6
83
3000 to 4950
49.0 to 59.4
101
4950 to 6000
Source Operation in other Modes/Features
Besides the normal network analyzer mode, the HP 8753D Option 011 has extra modes and
features to make additional types of measurements. The following describes the key dierences
in how the analyzer operates to achieve these new measurements.
Frequency Offset
The analyzer can measure frequency-translating devices with the frequency oset feature.
The receiver operates normally. However, the source is pretuned to a dierent frequency by
an oset entered by the user. The device under test will translate this frequency back to the
frequency the receiver expects. Otherwise, phase locking and source operation occur as usual.
Harmonic Analysis (Option 002)
The analyzer can measure the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the fundamental source frequency, on a
swept or CW basis, with the harmonic analysis feature (optional).
To make this measurement, the reference frequency (normally 1 MHz) from the A12 reference
assembly to the A11 phase lock assembly is divided by 1, 2, or 3. See Figure 12-6.
The fractional-N assemblies are also tuned so that the correct harmonic (comb tooth) of the
1st LO is 0.500 or 0.333 MHz below the source frequency instead of the usual 1.000 MHz. The
analyzer pretunes the A3 source normally, then phase locks the 1st IF to the new reference
frequency to sweep the fundamental source frequency in the usual way. The key dierence
is that the 1st IF (output from the R sampler) due to the fundamental and used for phase
locking is now 0.500 or 0.333 MHz instead of 1.000 MHz.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-15
Since the chosen VCO harmonic and the source dier by 0.500 or 0.333 MHz, then another
VCO harmonic, 2 or 3 times higher in frequency, will be exactly 1.000 MHz away from the
2nd or 3rd harmonic of the source frequency. The samplers, then, will also down-convert these
harmonics to yield the desired components in the 1st IF at 1.000 MHz. Narrow bandpass
lters in the receiver eliminate all but the 1.000 MHz signals; these pass through to be
processed and displayed.
Figure HARBLK12 here.
Figure 12-6. Harmonic Analysis
External Source Mode
In external source mode, the analyzer phase locks its receiver to an external signal source.
This source must be CW (not swept), but it does not need to be synthesized. The user must
enter the source frequency into the analyzer. (The analyzer's internal source output is not
used.)
To accomplish this, the phase lock loop is reconnected so that the tuning voltage from the
A11 phase lock assembly controls the VCO of the A14 fractional-N assembly and not the
A3 source. See Figure 12-7. The VCO's output still drives the 1st LO of the samplers and
down-converts the RF signal supplied by the external source. The resulting 1st IF is fed back
to the A11 phase lock assembly, compared to the 1.000 MHz reference, and used to generate
a tuning voltage as usual. However, the tuning voltage controls the VCO to lock on to the
external source, keeping the 1st IF at exactly 1.000 MHz.
The analyzer normally goes through a pretune-acquire-track sequence to achieve phase
lock. In external source mode, the fractional-N VCO pretunes as a closed-loop synthesizer
referenced to the 100 kHz signal from the A12 reference assembly. Then, to acquire or track,
a switch causes the VCO to be tuned by the A11 phase lock assembly instead. (Refer to the
Overall Block Diagram at the end of Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here.")
12-16 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure EXBLK12 here.
Figure 12-7. External Source Mode
Tuned Receiver Mode
In tuned receiver mode, the analyzer is a synthesized, swept, narrow-band receiver only. The
external signal source must be synthesized and reference-locked to the analyzer.
To achieve this, the analyzer's source and phase lock circuits are completely unused. See
Figure 12-8. The fractional-N synthesizer is tuned so that one of its harmonics (1st LO)
down-converts the RF input to the samplers. (In contrast to external source mode, the
analyzer does not phase lock at all. However, the 1st LO is synthesized.)
The analyzer can function as a swept tuned receiver, similar to a spectrum analyzer, but
the samplers create spurious signals at certain frequencies, which limit the accuracy of such
measurements.
Figure TRBLK12 here.
Figure 12-8. Tuned Receiver Mode
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-17
Signal Separation
External Test Sets
The HP 85047A S-parameter test set contains a switched frequency doubler to double the HP
8753C source frequency. A portion of the RF signal is coupled to the analyzer R input for
reference. (For an HP 8753D Option 011 combined with Option 006, the frequency doubler
is bypassed since the analyzer's source is capable of generating a swept RF signal up to 6
GHz.) The remaining signal is routed through a 70 dB programmable step attenuator to
the directional couplers for reection and transmission measurements. The couplers allow
detection of the signal from 300 kHz to 6 GHz. These couplers provide low insertion loss
between the RF input and the test ports. Two bias tees supply external biasing for active
devices. An HP 8753D Option 006/011 is required for use with the HP 85047A test set.
Figure 12-9a shows a simplied block diagram of the HP 85047A.
The HP 85046A/B S-parameter test set contains a power splitter to divert a portion of the
incident signal to the R input of the analyzer for reference. The remainder of the incident
signal is routed through a switch to one of two directional bridges at the measurement ports.
The RF path switch is controlled by the analyzer to enable switching between forward and
reverse measurements. A 70 dB step attenuator in the test set, also controlled from the
analyzer, adjusts the power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident
power in the reference path. Two bias tees are included, for external biasing of active devices
connected to the test ports. Figure 12-9b shows a simplied block diagram of the HP
85046A/B.
The HP 85044A/B transmission/reection test set contains a power splitter to divert a
portion of the incident signal to the R input of the analyzer. The remainder of the incident
signal is routed through a directional bridge to the measurement port. The test set includes
a manually controlled 70 dB step attenuator, and a bias tee for external biasing of active
devices connected to the test port. A simplied block diagram of the HP 85044A/B is shown
in Figure 12-9c.
An HP 11850C/D or 11667A power splitter can be used instead of a test set for transmission
measurements only.
12-18 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Figure TSBLK12 here.
Figure 12-9. Simplified Block Diagrams of the Test Sets
Receiver Theory
The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies:
A4 sampler/mixer
A5 sampler/mixer
A6 sampler/mixer
A10 digital IF
These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU (described in Digital Control Theory) to measure
and process input signals into digital information for display on the analyzer. Figure 12-10 is
a simplied block diagram of the receiver functional group. The A12 reference assembly is also
included in the illustration to show how the 2nd LO signal is derived.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-19
Figure RFGBLK12 here.
Figure 12-10. Receiver Functional Group, Simplified Block Diagram
A4/A5/A6 Sampler/Mixer
The A4, A5, and A6 sampler/mixers all down-convert the RF input signals to xed 4 kHz 2nd
IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the RF input.
The Sampler Circuit in High Band
In high band operation, the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by the 1st LO from
the A7 pulse generator assembly. The 1st LO is a comb of harmonics produced by a step
recovery diode driven by the fractional-N VCO fundamental signal. One of the harmonic
signals is 1 MHz below the start frequency set at the front panel. The 1st LO is combined
in the samplers with the RF input signal from the source. In the Option 006, samplers are
additionally capable of recognizing RF input signals from 3 to 6 GHz. The mixing products
are ltered, so that the only remaining response is the dierence between the source frequency
and the harmonic 1 MHz below it. This xed 1 MHz signal is the 1st IF. Part of the 1st IF
signal from the R sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly (the RF output must be
connected externally to the R input connector for phase-locked operation).
The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band
In low band or super low band (Option 011 combined with Option 006) the sampler diodes are
biased continuously on, so that the RF input signal passes through them unchanged. Thus the
1st IF is identical to the RF output signal from the source (300 kHz to 16 MHz for lowband;
10 to 300 kHz for super lowband), and sweeps with it. Part of the 1st IF signal from the R
sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly.
(Refer to \Source Theory Overview" for information on high band and low band operation of
the source.)
12-20 Theory of Operation
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
The 2nd LO Signal
The 2nd LO is obtained from the A12 reference assembly. In high band, the 2nd LO is xed
at 996 kHz. This is produced by feeding the 39.84 MHz output of a phase-locked oscillator in
the A12 assembly through a divide-by-40 circuit.
In low band, the 2nd LO is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output of the
fractional-N VCO with a xed 39.996 MHz signal in the A12 assembly. The 2nd LO covers
the range of 0.304 to 16.004 MHz (0.014 to 16.004 MHz if Option 011 is combined with
Option 006) in two subsweeps that correspond with the source subsweeps. These subsweeps
are 0.304 to 3.304 MHz and 3.304 to 16.004 MHz.
The Mixer Circuit
The 1st IF and the 2nd LO are combined in the mixer circuit. The resulting dierence
frequency (the 2nd IF) is a constant 4 kHz in both bands, as Table 12-4 shows.
Table 12-4. Mixer Frequencies
Band
1st IF
2nd LO
2nd IF
Super Low*
0.010 to 0.300 MHz
0.014 to 0.304 MHz
4.0 kHz
Low
0.300 to 16.0 MHz
0.304 to 16.004 MHz
4.0 kHz
High
1.000 MHz
0.996 MHz
4.0 kHz
* This band is present on the HP 8753D Option 011 only when it is combined with the Option 006.
A10 Digital IF
The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signals from the sampler/mixer assemblies are input to the A10
digital IF assembly. These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate. A fourth input is the analog
bus, which can monitor either an external input at the rear panel AUX IN connector, or
one of 31 internal nodes. A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the signals to the ADC
(analog-to-digital converter). Here they are converted to digital form and sent to the A9 CPU
assembly for processing. Refer to \Digital Control Theory" for more information on signal
processing.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:14
Theory of Operation 12-21
Contents
14. Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures
Replacing an assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures described in this chapter . . . . .
Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the side covers . . . . . . . . .
Removing the bottom cover . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type-N Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A2 Front Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A3 Source Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-2
14-3
14-4
14-4
14-4
14-4
14-6
14-6
14-6
14-6
14-6
14-8
14-8
14-8
14-10
14-12
14-12
14-12
14-14
14-16
14-16
14-16
14-18
14-20
14-20
14-20
14-20
14-22
14-22
14-22
14-22
14-24
14-24
14-24
14-24
14-26
14-26
14-26
14-26
14-28
14-28
Contents-1
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A9BT1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A15 Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A16 Rear Panel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A17 Motherboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A18 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A19 Graphics Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A20 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011 . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-28
14-28
14-30
14-30
14-30
14-30
14-32
14-32
14-32
14-32
14-34
14-34
14-34
14-34
14-36
14-36
14-36
14-36
14-38
14-38
14-38
14-40
14-42
14-42
14-42
14-42
14-44
14-44
14-44
14-44
14-46
14-46
14-46
14-46
14-48
14-48
14-48
14-48
14-50
14-50
14-50
14-50
14-52
Index
Contents-2
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Tables
14-1. Related Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
14-52
Contents-3
Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
14
This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the
HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer. A table showing the corresponding post-repair
procedures for each replaced assembly is located at the end of this chapter.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-1
Post-Repair Procedures
Replacing an assembly
The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Option 011
Network Analyzer.
1. Identify the faulty group. Refer to Chapter 4, \Start Troubleshooting Here." Follow up
with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identies the faulty assembly.
2. Order a replacement assembly. Refer to Chapter 13, \Replaceable Parts."
3. Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary. Refer to
Chapter 14, \Assembly Replacement and Post-Repair Procedures."
4. Perform the necessary adjustments. Refer to Chapter 3, \Adjustments and Correction
Constants."
5. Perform the necessary performance tests. Refer to Chapter 2, \System Verication and
Performance Tests."
Warning
Warning
Warning
Caution
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid
electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous
voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being
opened.
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for
10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply.
Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from
ESD (electrostatic discharge). Perform the following procedures only at a
static-safe workstation and wear a grounding strap.
14-2 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Procedures described in this chapter
The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the HP 8753D Option 011
assemblies listed below:
Line Fuse
Covers
Front Panel Assembly
Rear Panel Assembly
Type-N Connector Assembly
A1 Keyboard
A2 Front Panel Interface
A3 Source Assembly
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
A9 CPU Board
A9BT1 Battery
A15 Preregulator
A16 Rear Panel Interface
A17 Motherboard Assembly
A18 Display
A19 Graphics Processor
A20 Disk Drive
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
B1 Fan
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-3
Post-Repair Procedures
Line Fuse
Tools Required
small slot screwdriver
Removal
Warning
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace fuse only with same type
and rating (3 A 250 V F). The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited.
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder.
3. Replace the blown fuse with a 3 A 250 V F fuse (HP part number 2110-0708).
Replacement
Simply replace the fuse holder.
14-4 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Line Fuse
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-5
Post-Repair Procedures
Covers
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
T-20 TORX screwdriver
Removing the top cover
1. Remove both upper rear feet (item 1) by loosening the attaching screws (item 2).
2. Loosen the top cover screw (item 3).
3. Slide cover o.
Removing the side covers
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the lower rear foot (item 4) that corresponds to the side cover you want to remove
by loosening the attaching screw (item 5).
3. Remove the handle assembly (item 6) by loosening the attaching screws (item 7).
4. Slide cover o.
Removing the bottom cover
1. Remove both lower rear feet (item 4) by loosening the attaching screws (item 5).
2. Loosen the bottom cover screw (item 8).
3. Slide cover o.
14-6 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Covers
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-7
Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Assembly
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the bezel's softkey cover (item 1) by sliding your ngernail under the left edge,
near the top or bottom of the cover. Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel. If you use
another tool, take care not to scratch the glass.
3. Remove the two screws (item 2) exposed by the previous step. The bezel (item 3) is now
free from the frame. Remove it.
4. Remove the trim strip (item 4) from the top edge of the front frame by prying under the
strip with a small slot screwdriver.
5. Remove the two screws (item 5) from the top edge of the frame.
6. Remove the left-side trim strip (item 6) from the front frame to expose four screws.
Remove the bottom screw (item 7).
14-8 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Front Panel Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-9
Post-Repair Procedures
Front Panel Assembly
7.
8.
9.
10.
Remove both front feet (item 8).
Remove the four screws (item 9) from the bottom edge of the frame.
Slide the front panel over the four Type-N connectors (item 10).
Disconnect the ribbon cable (W17) from the front panel by pressing down and out on the
connector locks. The front panel is now free from the instrument.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When reconnecting semi-rigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
14-10 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Front Panel Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-11
Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Assembly
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers (refer to \Covers" in this
chapter).
2. Remove six screws (item 1) from the rear frame: two from the top edge and four from the
bottom edge.
3. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer (item 2) and remove the stabilizer.
4. Lift the reference board (A12) from its motherboard connector and disconnect W13 from
A12J3.
5. Remove the six screws (item 3), next to the preregulator, from the rear panel as shown.
6. Remove the four screws (item 4), surrounding the connector interfaces, from the rear panel
as shown.
14-12 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Rear Panel Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-13
Post-Repair Procedures
Rear Panel Assembly
7. Pull the rear panel away from the frame. Disconnect the ribbon cable (W27) from the
motherboard connector (A17J6), pressing down and out on the connector locks. The rear
panel is now connected only by three exible cables (W21, W22, and W23).
8. Remove the bracket (item 5) that secures the graphics board (A19), removing the two
screws that attach it to the rear frame. The preregulator is now sitting loosely in the
instrument . Gently press the top of the graphics board (A19) towards the display (A18)
then lift up. Disconnect the three exible cables (W21, W22, and W23) from the graphics
board (A19). The rear panel is now detached.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-14 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Rear Panel Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-15
Post-Repair Procedures
Type-N Connector Assembly
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
Remove the front panel (refer to \Front Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
Remove the source bracket (item 1).
Disconnect the semi-rigid cables (W1, W2, W3, and W4) from the source and the samplers.
Remove the two screws (item 2) that secure the bracket (item 3) holding the semi-rigid
cables against the card cage assembly. Remove the bracket.
6. Remove the right-side trim strip (item 4) from the front frame. Remove the screw (item 5)
that secures the right end of the Type-N connector bracket.
14-16 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Type-N Connector Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-17
Post-Repair Procedures
Type-N Connector Assembly
7. Remove the three screws (item 6) from the bottom edge of the front frame that secure the
connector bracket. Remove the connector assembly (item 7).
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When reconnecting semi-rigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
14-18 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Type-N Connector Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-19
Post-Repair Procedures
A1 Keyboard
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1. Remove the front panel interface board (refer to \A2 Front Panel Interface" in this
chapter).
2. Remove the eight screws (item 2) that attach the front panel keyboard assembly (A1) to
the front panel. Detach the keyboard assembly.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When reinstalling the keyboard assembly (A1), place the eight screws in the
holes plated with a circular pattern. (The other four holes secure the interface
board (A2).)
Initially, you should install all eight screws loosely. Then you can go back and
tighten each one. This will ensure that the board is correctly aligned.
14-20 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A1 Keyboard
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-21
Post-Repair Procedures
A2 Front Panel Interface
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
Removal
1. Remove the front panel (refer to \Front Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
2. Disconnect W18, W19, and RPG1W1 from the interface board (A2).
3. Disconnect A1W1 from the interface board (A2), inserting the blade of a small slot
screwdriver into the slots on the sides of the ribbon cable connector. Gently pry upward on
either side of the connector until the ribbon cable is detached.
4. Remove the four screws (item 1) from the corners of the interface board (A2). Remove the
board.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-22 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A2 Front Panel Interface
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-23
Post-Repair Procedures
A3 Source Assembly
Tools Required
T-15 TORX screwdriver
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
2. Remove the source bracket (item 1).
3. Disconnect the semi-rigid cable (W1) from the source assembly (A3). If you have Option
006, remove the exible cable (W26) from the source as well.
4. Lift the two retention clips (item 2) at the front and rear of the source assembly (A3) to an
upright position.
5. The source is seated in a motherboard edge connector. Hold the loose semi-rigid cable
(W1) to the right and lift up on the source bracket handle (item 3) to remove the source
assembly from the instrument.
Replacement
1. Slide the edges of the sheet metal partition (item 4) into the guides at the front and back
of the source compartment. Press down on the module to ensure that it is well seated in
the motherboard connector.
2. Push down the retention clips. Reconnect the semi-rigid cable (W1) to the source assembly.
If you have Option 006, reconnect the exible cable (W26) to the source as well.
Note
When reconnecting semi-rigid cables, it is recommended that the connections
be torqued to 10 in-lb.
14-24 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A3 Source Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-25
Post-Repair Procedures
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
To remove the R sampler (A4), you must remove the source bracket (item 1).
Disconnect all cables from the top of the sampler (A4/A5/A6) or pulse generator (A7).
Remove the screws from the top of the assembly. Extract the assembly from the slot.
Note
If you are removing the pulse generator (A7), the grounding clip, which rests
on top of the assembly, will become loose once the four screws are removed.
Be sure to replace the grounding clip when reinstalling the pulse generator
assembly.
If you're removing more than one sampler, be careful not to mix them. The
R sampler (A4) is dierent from the A and B samplers (A5 and A6).
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When reconnecting semi-rigid cables, it is recommended that the
connections be torqued to 10 in-lb.
Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should be hanging in
the A11 and A14 board slots. Routing the wires in this manner will reduce
noise and crosstalk.
14-26 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-27
Post-Repair Procedures
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
2. Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer (item 1) and remove the stabilizer.
3. Lift the two extractors (item 2) located at each end of the board. Lift the board from the
card cage slot, just enough to disconnect any exible cables that may be connected to it.
4. Remove the board from the card cage slot.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown. No excess wire should be hanging in
the A11 and A14 board slots. Routing the wires in this manner will reduce
noise and crosstalk in the instrument.
14-28 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-29
Post-Repair Procedures
A9 CPU Board
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the power cord.
Remove the four screws (item 1) on the rear panel.
Remove the bottom cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
Remove the screw (item 2) that secures the CPU board (A9) to the deck. Slide the board
towards the front of the instrument so that it disconnects from the three standos (item 3).
5. Disconnect the four ribbon cables (W37, W20, W35, and W36) from the CPU board (A9).
6. Lift the board o of the standos.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-30 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A9 CPU Board
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-31
Post-Repair Procedures
A9BT1 Battery
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
soldering iron with associated soldering tools
Removal
1. Remove the A9 CPU board (refer to \A9 CPU Board" in this chapter).
2. Unsolder and remove A9BT1 from the A9 CPU board.
Warning
Battery A9BT1 contains lithium. Do not incinerate or puncture this battery.
Dispose of the discharged battery in a safe manner.
Replacement
1. Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct polarity.
2. Solder the battery into place.
3. Replace the A9 CPU board (refer to \A9 CPU Board" in this chapter).
14-32 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A9BT1 Battery
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-33
Post-Repair Procedures
A15 Preregulator
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to \Rear Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
2. Disconnect the wire bundle (A15W1) from A8J2 and A17J3.
3. Remove the preregulator (A15) from the frame.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When reinstalling the preregulator (A15), make sure the three grommets
(item 1) on A15W1 are seated in the two slots (item 2) on the back side of
the preregulator and the slot (item 3) in the card cage wall.
After reinstalling the preregulator (A15), be sure to set the line voltage
selector to the appropriate setting, 115 V or 230 V.
14-34 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A15 Preregulator
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-35
Post-Repair Procedures
A16 Rear Panel Interface
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
3/16-inch hex-nut driver
9/16-inch hex-nut driver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the rear panel (refer to \Rear Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
If you have Option 1D5, disconnect W30 from the rear panel interface board (A16).
Remove the hex nuts and washers from the BNC connectors (item 5) as shown.
Remove the two hex screws and washers that attach the test set-I/O interconnect (item 6).
Remove the rear panel board (A16).
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-36 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A16 Rear Panel Interface
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-37
Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
T-20 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
2.5 mm hex-key driver
5/16-inch open-end torque wrench (set to 10 in-lb)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top, bottom, and side covers (refer to \Covers"
in this chapter).
2. Remove the front panel assembly (refer to \Front Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
3. Remove the rear panel assembly (refer to \Rear Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
4. Remove the preregulator (refer to \A15 Preregulator" in this chapter).
5. Remove the fan (refer to \B1 Fan" in this chapter).
6. Remove the graphics processor (refer to \A19 Graphics Processor" in this chapter).
7. Remove the Type-N connector assembly (refer to \Type-N Connector Assembly" in this
chapter).
8. Remove the disk drive deck (refer to \A20 Disk Drive" in this chapter).
9. Remove the CPU board (refer to \A9 CPU Board" in this chapter).
10. Remove the memory deck (item 1) by removing three screws (item 2) from the bottom
corner struts of the motherboard/card cage assembly. There are two screws on the right
side and one on the left side.
14-38 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A17 Motherboard Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-39
Post-Repair Procedures
A17 Motherboard Assembly
11. Remove the display (refer to \A18 Display" in this chapter).
12. Remove the source assembly (refer to \A3 Source Assembly" in this chapter).
13. Remove the samplers and pulse generator (refer to \A4, A5, A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse
Generator" in this chapter).
14. Remove the card cage boards (refer to \A8, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14 Card Cage Boards"
in this chapter).
15. Remove the bezel support (item 3) by removing the three screws (item 4) from the left
side of the front frame.
16. Remove the actuator assembly (item 5) and insulator strip (item 6) by unhooking the
spring (item 7) and removing the screw (item 8) that secures them to the display housing.
17. Remove the front frame (item 9) and rear frame (item 10) by removing the attaching
screws (item 11). At this point, only the motherboard/card cage assembly should remain.
This whole assembly is replaceable.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-40 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A17 Motherboard Assembly
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-41
Post-Repair Procedures
A18 Display
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the bezel's softkey cover (item 1) by sliding your ngernail under the left edge,
near the top or bottom of the cover. Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel. If you use
another tool, take care not to scratch the glass.
3. Remove the two screws (item 2) exposed by the previous step. The bezel (item 3) is now
free from the frame. Remove it.
4. Remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable (A18W1) from the graphics processor board (A19).
6. Remove the four screws (item 4) on the top of the display housing.
7. Slide the display (A18) out of the instrument, pushing on the back of the display assembly.
There is an opening at the rear of the display housing where you can reach in with a couple
of ngers to push the display.
Replacement
1. Remove the bottom shield that is attached to the replacement display. Install the bottom
shield on the old display assembly before you return it for repair.
2. Ensure the ribbon cable (A18W1) is connected to the display so you can retrieve it through
the opening in the rear of the display housing when you reinstall the display.
3. Reverse the order of the removal procedure with the exception that the four screws (item
4) should not be tightened until after you have reinstalled the bezel assembly and pushed
the display forward in the display housing so that it is rmly pressing against the bezel
assembly.
14-42 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A18 Display
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-43
Post-Repair Procedures
A19 Graphics Processor
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover (refer to \Covers" in this chapter).
2. Remove the clip (item 1) that secures the graphics processor board (A19), removing the
two screws that attach it to the rear frame. Gently press the top of the graphics processor
board (A19) towards the display (A18), then lift up.
3. Disconnect the two ribbon cables (A18W1 and W20) and the wire bundle (W14) from the
graphics processor board (A19).
4. Disconnect the three exible cables (W21, W22, and W23) from the graphics processor
board (A19). Remove the board.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
14-44 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A19 Graphics Processor
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-45
Post-Repair Procedures
A20 Disk Drive
Tools Required
T-8 TORX screwdriver
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
small slot screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover (refer to \Covers" in this
chapter).
2. Remove the front panel (refer to \Front Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
3. Turn the instrument upside-down and disconnect the ribbon cable, W37, from the CPU
board (A9J15).
4. Remove the two screws (item 1) that secure the disk drive deck to the bottom edge of the
front frame.
5. Slide the disk drive deck out of the instrument.
6. Remove the four screws that secure the disk drive (A20) to the deck. Remove the drive
from the deck.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
When replacing the disk drive deck, ensure that the two tabs (item 2) at the
rear of the deck slide into the slots (item 3) of the CPU board deck.
14-46 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A20 Disk Drive
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-47
Post-Repair Procedures
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
Tools Required
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
9/16-inch hex-nut driver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to \Rear Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
2. Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board (A26).
3. Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the \10 MHz PRECISION
REFERENCE" connector (item 1) on the rear panel.
4. Remove the screw (item 2) that secures the high stability frequency reference board (A26)
to the bracket.
5. Slide the board out of the bracket. Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer washer (item 3)
that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed.
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board (A26) into the
bracket, be sure the plastic spacer washer (item 3) is on the BNC connector.
14-48 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
A26 High Stability Frequency Reference (Option 1D5)
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-49
Post-Repair Procedures
B1 Fan
Tools Required
2.5 mm hex-key driver
T-10 TORX screwdriver
T-15 TORX screwdriver
ESD (electrostatic discharge) grounding wrist strap
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel (refer to \Rear Panel Assembly" in this chapter).
2. Disconnect the fan harness (B1W1) from the motherboard (A17J5).
3. Remove the four screws and washers (item 1) that secure the fan (B1).
Replacement
Reverse the order of the removal procedure.
Note
The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air ow is away from
the instrument. There is an arrow on the fan chassis indicating the air ow
direction.
14-50 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
B1 Fan
Insert artwork here.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-51
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011
Table 14-1 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the
instrument is working correctly, following the replacement of an assembly.
Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table.
Replaced
Assembly
A1 Front Panel
Keyboard
A2 Front Panel
Interface
A3 Source
Table 14-1. Related Service Procedures
Verication
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
None
None
Internal Test 0
Internal Test 23
Internal Test 0
Internal Test 23
Output Power
Spectral Purity
(harmonics and mixer spurs)
A9 CC Jumper Positions
Source Def CC (Test 44)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
or
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54)
On-Site Verication
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
Minimum R Level
A4/A5/A6 Samplers A9CC Jumper Positions
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) (if R sampler replaced)
Input Crosstalk
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk
Frequency Response
Input Impedance
(replace assembly only)
or
A7 Pulse Generator
On-Site Verication
Frequency Response
A9CC Jumper Positions
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Frequency Range and Accuracy
Spectral Purity (phase noise)
EEPROM Backup Disk
or
A8 Post Regulator
On-Site Verication
Internal Test 0
A9CC Jumper Positions
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54) Check A8 test point voltages
Source Spur Avoidance Tracking
EEPROM Backup Disk
14-52 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Table 14-1 Related Service Procedures (2 of 3)
Replaced
Assembly
A9 CPU1
Firmware Rev 5.20
08753-60185
A10 Digital IF
1
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
Verication
Output Power
A9CC Jumper Positions
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Serial Number CC (Test 55)
Frequency Response
Option Number CC (Test 56)
Display Intensity and Focus CC (Test 49) Dynamic Accuracy
Source Def CC (Test 44)
or
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
On-Site Verication
Cal Kit Default (Test 57)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53)
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC (Test 54)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Internal Test 0
A9CC Jumper Positions
Source Default CC 9 (Test 44)
Pretune Default CC (Test 45)
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
RF Output Power CC (Test 47)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 47)
EEPROM Backup Disk
Receiver Noise Level
A9CC Jumper Positions
Trace Noise
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC (Test 53) Input Crosstalk
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
ADC Linearity CC (Test 52)
IF Amplier CC (Test 51)
or
EEPROM Backup Disk
If you have an EEPROM backup disk available, you only need to perform the rst three tests listed.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Assembly Replacement and 14-53
Post-Repair Procedures
Table 14-1 Related Service Procedures (3 of 3)
Replaced
Assembly
A11 Phase Lock
A12 Reference
A13 Fractional-N
(Analog)
A14 Fractional-N
(Digital)
A15 Preregulator
A16 Rear Panel
Interface
A17 Motherboard
A18 Display
Adjustments
Correction Constants (CC)
A9CC Jumper Positions
Analog Bus CC (Test 46)
Source Pretune CC (Test 48)
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
High/Low Band Transition
Frequency Accuracy
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
Fractional-N Spur and
FM Sideband
EEPROM Backup Disk
A9CC Jumper Positions
Fractional-N Frequency Range
EEPROM Backup Disk
None
None
None
Vertical Position and Focus
(only if needed)
A19 Graphics System None
Processor
14-54 Assembly Replacement and
Post-Repair Procedures
Verication On-Site Verication
Minimum R Level
Frequency Accuracy
or
On-Site Verication
Frequency Range and Accuracy
Spectral Purity
(other spurious signals)
Frequency Range and Accuracy
Frequency Range and Accuracy
or
On-Site Verication
Self-Test
Internal Test 13,
Rear Panel
Self-Test
Observation of Display Tests
66 - 80
Observation of Display Tests
59 - 80
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Contents
15. Safety and Licensing
Notice . . . . . . . . . . .
Certication . . . . . . . .
Warranty . . . . . . . . .
Assistance . . . . . . . .
Shipment for Service . . .
Safety Symbols . . . . . . .
Instrument Markings . . . .
General Safety Considerations
Safety Earth Ground . . .
Before Applying Power . .
Servicing . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-1
15-1
15-1
15-2
15-4
15-5
15-5
15-6
15-6
15-6
15-6
Index
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Contents-1
15
Safety and Licensing
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including
but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and tness for a particular
purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
Certification
Hewlett-Packard Company certies that this product met its published specications at the
time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and to the calibration
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. During the warranty period,
Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to
be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated
by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and
Hewlett-Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer
shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to Hewlett-Packard
from another country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and rmware designated by Hewlett-Packard for
use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on
that instrument. Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or
software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or error-free.
Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate
maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or
misuse, operation outside of the environmental specications for the product, or improper
site preparation or maintenance.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Safety and Licensing 15-1
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exclusive Remedies
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for
Hewlett-Packard products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Oce.
15-2 Safety and Licensing
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
US FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
California, Northern
California, Southern
Hewlett-Packard Co.
19320 Pruneridge Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014
(800) 752-0900
Hewlett-Packard Co.
301 E. Evelyn
Mountain View, CA 94041
(415) 694-2000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
1421 South Manhattan Ave.
Fullerton, CA 92631
(714) 999-6700
Colorado
Atlanta Annex
Illinois
New Jersey
Texas
Hewlett-Packard Co.
24 Inverness Place, East
Englewood, CO 80112
(303) 649-5512
Hewlett-Packard Co.
2124 Barrett Park Drive
Kennesaw, GA 30144
(404) 648-0000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
150 Green Pond Rd.
Rockaway, NJ 07866
(201) 586-5400
Hewlett-Packard Co.
545 E. Algonquin Rd.
Arlington Heights, IL 60005
(847) 342-2000
Hewlett-Packard Co.
930 E. Campbell Rd.
Richardson, TX 75081
(214) 231-6101
EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
Hewlett-Packard S.A.
150, Route du Nant-d'Avril
1217 Meyrin 2/Geneva
Switzerland
(41 22) 780.8111
Great Britain
France
Hewlett-Packard France
1 Avenue Du Canada
Zone D'Activite De Courtaboeuf
F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex
France
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Germany
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Hewlett-Packard Strasse
61352 Bad Homburg v.d.H
Germany
(49 6172) 16-0
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle
Wokingham, Berkshire RG41 5DZ
England
(44 734) 696622
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Safety and Licensing 15-3
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices (continued)
INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS
Headquarters
Hewlett-Packard Company
3495 Deer Creek Road
Palo Alto, California, USA
94304-1316
(415) 857-5027
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
Blackburn, Victoria 3130
(61 3) 895-2895
Australia
Canada
China
Japan
Singapore
China Hewlett-Packard Company
38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Dian District
Beijing, China
(86 1) 256-6888
Hewlett-Packard Japan, Ltd.
9-1 Takakura-Cho, Hachioji
Tokyo 192, Japan
(81 426) 60-2111
Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
17500 South Service Road
Trans-Canada Highway
Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
Canada
(514) 697-4232
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd.
150 Beach Road
#29-00 Gateway West
Singapore 0718
(65) 291-9088
Taiwan
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan
8th Floor, H-P Building
337 Fu Hsing North Road
Taipei, Taiwan
(886 2) 712-0404
Shipment for Service
If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett-Packard for service, ship the analyzer to the
nearest HP service center for repair, including a description of any failed test and any error
message. Ship the analyzer, using the original or comparable anti-static packaging materials.
A listing of Hewlett-Packard sales and service oces is provided in Table 15-1.
15-4 Safety and Licensing
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with each
of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument.
Caution
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or destruction
of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
Warning
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do
not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
L
Instrument Markings
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with this symbol when
it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.
\CE" The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community. (If accompanied
by a year, it is when the design was proven.)
\ISM1-A" This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientic and Medical Group 1 Class A product.
\CSA" The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15
Safety and Licensing 15-5
General Safety Considerations
Safety Earth Ground
Warning
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing ground
incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only be inserted in a
socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact. Any interruption of the
protective conductor, inside or outside the instrument, is likely to make the
instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Before Applying Power
Caution
Make sure that the analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of
the power supply and the correct fuse is installed.
Caution
If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the
common terminal is connected to the neutral (grounded side of the mains
supply).
Servicing
Warning
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel. To
prevent electrical shock, do not remove covers.
Warning
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid
electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.
Warning
The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous
voltages. Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being
opened.
Warning
Adjustments described in this document may be performed with power supplied
to the product while protective covers are removed. Energy available at many
points may, if contacted, result in personal injury.
Warning
The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for
10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply.
Warning
For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same
type and rating (F 3 A/250 V). The use of other fuses or material is prohibited.
15-6 Safety and Licensing
DRAFT
3/21/106 15:15